Mercedes - S-Class Coupe - Owners Manual - 20215 - 2015

É2175849500_ËÍ 2175849500 Order no. 6515 4514 13 Part no. 217 584 95 00 Edition C 2015 S-Class Coupe Operator's Manual S-Class Coupe Operator's Manual Symbols Registered trademarks: RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc. RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls. RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. RBurmester® is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. RGracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC. In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols: X This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed. Several of these symbols in succesX sion indicate an instruction with several steps. This symbol tells you where you can (Y page) find more information about a topic. This symbol indicates a warning or an YY instruction that is continued on the next page. This text indicates a message in the Dis play multifunction/COMAND/Audio display. ~ This symbol tells you that you can find further information in the Digital Operator's Manual. Parts of the software in the vehicle are protected by copyright © 2005 The FreeType Project http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved. Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Editorial office ©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others. H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. ! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you. As at 13.02.2014 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty. This Operator's Manual provides information on the most important functions of your vehicle. Additional information on convenience functions can be found in COMAND in your Digital Operator's Manual. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company Rmodel Rorder Rcountry specification Ravailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: RDigital Operator's Manual Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. ROperator's 2175849500 É2175849500_ËÍ Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 31 Digital Operator's Manual .................. 21 Safety ................................................... 41 Introduction ......................................... 23 Opening and closing ........................... 77 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95 Lights and windshield wipers .......... 101 Climate control ................................. 109 Driving and parking .......................... 113 On-board computer and displays .... 159 COMAND ............................................ 187 Stowage and features ...................... 195 Maintenance and care ...................... 209 Roadside Assistance ........................ 219 Wheels and tires ............................... 239 Technical data ................................... 273 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4ETS see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 141 12 V socket see Sockets 360° camera Cleaning ......................................... 217 Function/notes ............................. 146 A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 166 Function/notes ................................ 66 Important safety notes .................... 66 Warning lamp ................................. 179 Accident Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 60 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 111 Activating/deactivating Night View Assist Plus With spotlight function ................... 152 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 164 Display message ............................ 165 Function/information .................... 153 Active Body Control (ABC) Function/notes ............................. 140 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 164 Display message ............................ 165 Function/information .................... 155 Active multicontour seat .................... 98 Active Parking Assist Display message ............................ 165 Function/notes ............................. 143 Important safety notes .................. 143 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 73 Adaptive Brake Assist Function/notes ................................ 70 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 165 Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS Function/notes ............................. 104 Switching on/off ........................... 105 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 278 Address book see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 Air bags Deployment ..................................... 57 Display message ............................ 172 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 50 Important safety notes .................... 48 Introduction ..................................... 48 Knee bag .......................................... 50 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 43 Side impact air bag .......................... 50 Window curtain air bag .................... 51 Air vents Setting ........................................... 111 Air-conditioning system see Climate control AIRMATIC Function/notes ............................. 140 Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 76 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 76 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 76 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Ashtray ............................................... 198 Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 164 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 216 Hiding a service message .............. 216 Notes ............................................. 216 Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 216 Service message ............................ 216 Index Special service requirements ......... 216 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 76 Function ........................................... 76 Switching off the alarm .................... 76 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 164 Display message ............................ 165 Function/notes ............................. 148 Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ 165 Automatic car wash (care) ............... 216 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... 119 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 119 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 103 Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. 121 Automatic drive program ............... 121 Changing gear ............................... 121 DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 120 Display message ............................ 165 Driving tips .................................... 121 Emergency running mode .............. 121 Engaging drive position .................. 120 Engaging neutral ............................ 120 Engaging park position automatically ............................................... 120 Engaging reverse gear ................... 120 Engaging the park position ............ 120 Kickdown ....................................... 121 Manual drive program (AMG vehicles) ............................................... 121 Overview ........................................ 120 Problem (malfunction) ................... 121 Program selector button ................ 121 Pulling away ................................... 118 Starting the engine ........................ 118 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 121 Transmission position display ........ 121 Transmission positions .................. 121 Automatic transmission emergency mode ....................................... 121 B Back button ....................................... 193 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 66 BAS PLUS Q (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist Function/notes ................................ 67 Important safety notes .................... 67 Battery (SmartKey) Checking .......................................... 81 Important safety notes .................... 81 Replacing ......................................... 81 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 227 Important safety notes .................. 225 Jump starting ................................. 229 Belt see Seat belts Blind Spot Assist see Active Blind Spot Assist Bluetooth® see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 169 Notes ............................................. 278 Brake force distribution, electronic see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake lamps Display message ............................ 165 Brakes ABS .................................................. 66 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 70 BAS .................................................. 66 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 67 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 278 Display message ............................ 166 EBD .................................................. 73 High-performance brake system .... 128 Hill start assist ............................... 118 5 6 Index HOLD function ............................... 138 Important safety notes .................. 128 Maintenance .................................. 128 Parking brake ................................ 126 Riding tips ...................................... 128 Warning lamp ................................. 178 Breakdown see Flat tire see Towing away Brightness control (instrument cluster lighting) ................................... 35 Buttons and controller ...................... 192 Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 161 C California Important notice for retail customers and lessees .......................... 25 Calling up a malfunction see Display messages Car see Vehicle Car key see SmartKey Care 360° camera ................................. 217 Car wash ........................................ 216 Carpets .......................................... 218 Display ........................................... 218 Exhaust pipe .................................. 217 Exterior lights ................................ 217 Gear or selector lever .................... 218 Interior ........................................... 218 Matte finish ................................... 217 Night View Assist Plus ................... 218 Notes ............................................. 216 Paint .............................................. 217 Plastic trim .................................... 218 Power washer ................................ 217 Rear view camera .......................... 217 Roof lining ...................................... 218 Seat belt ........................................ 218 Seat cover ..................................... 218 Sensors ......................................... 217 Trim pieces .................................... 218 Washing by hand ........................... 217 Wheels ........................................... 217 CD Windows ........................................ 217 Wiper blades .................................. 217 Wooden trim .................................. 218 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 CD player/CD changer (on-board computer) .......................................... 164 Center console Overview .......................................... 37 Center console in the rear compartment Stowage compartment .................. 197 Central locking Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 79 Child Restraint system .............................. 62 Child seat Forward-facing restraint system ...... 65 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ............................................ 63 On the front-passenger seat ............ 64 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 64 Top Tether ....................................... 63 Children In the vehicle ................................... 60 Special seat belt retractor ............... 61 Cigarette lighter ................................ 198 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 217 Climate control Automatic climate control ............. 111 Controlling automatically ............... 111 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 111 Defrosting the windows ................. 111 Defrosting the windshield .............. 111 General notes ................................ 110 Indicator lamp ................................ 111 Ionization ....................................... 111 Overview of systems ...................... 110 Perfume atomizer .......................... 111 Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 111 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 111 Refrigerant ..................................... 280 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 280 Setting the air distribution ............. 111 Index Setting the airflow ......................... 111 Setting the climate mode ............... 111 Setting the temperature ................ 111 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 111 Switching on/off ........................... 111 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 111 Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 111 Switching the synchronization function on and off ........................ 111 Climate control system Automatic engine start .................. 119 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 119 Deactivating/activating ................. 119 Important safety notes .................. 119 Introduction ................................... 119 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 32 see Instrument cluster COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Activating/deactivating ................. 164 Operation/notes .............................. 68 COMAND Controller ...................................... 192 Display ........................................... 192 Combination switch .......................... 103 Connecting a USB device see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 164 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 214 Display message ............................ 174 Filling capacity ............................... 279 Important safety notes .................. 279 Temperature gauge ........................ 160 Warning lamp ................................. 183 Coolbox .............................................. 198 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ............................................. 30 Cornering light function Display message ............................ 165 Function/notes ............................. 103 Crash-responsive emergency lighting ....................................................... 105 Crosswind Assist (vehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ................... 140 Crosswind Assist (vehicles without MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ............... 72 Cruise control Activation conditions ..................... 130 Cruise control lever ....................... 130 Deactivating ................................... 130 Display message ............................ 165 Driving system ............................... 129 Function/notes ............................. 129 Important safety notes .................. 129 Selecting ........................................ 130 Setting a speed .............................. 130 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 130 Cup holder Important safety notes .................. 198 Rear compartment ......................... 198 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ..................................................... 28 Customer Relations Department ....... 28 D Data see Technical data Daytime running lamps Display message ............................ 165 Function/notes ............................. 103 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 164 Declarations of conformity ................. 27 Diagnostics connection ...................... 27 Digital Operator's Manual Help ................................................. 21 Introduction ..................................... 21 Digital speedometer ......................... 164 DIRECT SELECT lever Automatic transmission ................. 120 Display see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 218 Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 216 7 8 Index Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 165 Engine ............................................ 174 General notes ................................ 165 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 165 Introduction ................................... 165 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 165 Lights ............................................. 165 Safety systems .............................. 166 SmartKey ....................................... 165 Tires ............................................... 175 Vehicle ........................................... 176 Distance recorder ............................. 164 see Odometer see Trip odometer Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 184 Distance warning function Activating/deactivating ................. 164 Function/notes ................................ 69 DISTRONIC PLUS Activating ....................................... 132 Activation conditions ..................... 132 Cruise control lever ....................... 132 Deactivating ................................... 134 Display message ............................ 165 Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ 134 Driving tips .................................... 135 Function/notes ............................. 130 Important safety notes .................. 131 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 134 Door control panel Overview .......................................... 39 Doors Automatic locking (switch) ............... 82 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ....................................... 79 Display message ............................ 165 Emergency locking ........................... 83 Emergency unlocking ....................... 83 Important safety notes .................... 82 Opening (from inside) ...................... 82 Power closing .................................. 82 Drinking and driving ......................... 127 Drive program Automatic ...................................... 121 Manual (AMG vehicles) .................. 121 Driver's door see Doors Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 216 Symmetrical low beam .................. 102 Driving Assistance package ............. 152 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 66 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 73 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 70 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 66 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 67 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS ................................................ 68 Distance warning function ............... 69 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 73 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 71 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ........................................... 71 Important safety information ........... 65 Overview .......................................... 65 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 73 STEER CONTROL ............................. 75 Driving systems 360°camera .................................. 146 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 153 Active Body Control ABC ............... 140 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 155 Active Parking Assist ..................... 143 AIRMATIC ...................................... 140 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 148 Cruise control ................................ 129 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 130 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 136 Driving Assistance package ........... 152 HOLD function ............................... 138 Night View Assist Plus ................... 150 PARKTRONIC ................................. 142 Rear view camera .......................... 144 Driving tips AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 128 Automatic transmission ................. 121 Brakes ........................................... 128 Index Break-in period .............................. DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... Downhill gradient ........................... Drinking and driving ....................... Driving abroad ............................... Driving in winter ............................. Driving on flooded roads ................ Driving on wet roads ...................... Exhaust check ............................... Fuel ................................................ General .......................................... Hydroplaning ................................. Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... Snow chains .................................. Symmetrical low beam .................. The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... Wet road surface ........................... DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 114 135 128 127 102 128 128 128 127 127 127 128 128 128 242 102 114 128 164 188 E EASY-ENTRY feature Function/notes ................................ 99 EASY-EXIT feature Function/notes ................................ 99 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 169 Function/notes ................................ 73 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 128 ECO start/stop function General information ....................... 119 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 60 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 83 Trunk ............................................... 89 Vehicle ............................................. 83 Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation ......................................... 57 Emissions control Service and warranty information .... 24 Engine Check Engine warning lamp ........... 176 Display message ............................ 174 ECO start/stop function ................ 119 Engine number ............................... 275 Irregular running ............................ 119 Jump-starting ................................. 229 Starting problems .......................... 119 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ....................................... 118 Starting with the Start/Stop button ................................................. 118 Switching off .................................. 126 Switching off with the Start/Stop button ............................................ 126 Switching off with the vehicle key .. 126 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 234 Engine electronics Problem (malfunction) ................... 119 Engine emergency stop .................... 237 Engine oil Adding ........................................... 213 Additives ........................................ 278 Checking the oil level ..................... 211 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 211 Checking the oil level using the on-board computer ........................ 213 Display message ............................ 165 Filling capacity ............................... 278 Notes about oil grades ................... 277 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 211 Viscosity ........................................ 278 Entering an address see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Characteristics ................................. 71 Deactivating/activating ................... 72 Display message ............................ 166 ETS/4ETS ........................................ 71 Function/notes ................................ 71 General notes .................................. 71 9 10 Index Important safety information ........... 71 Warning lamp ................................. 181 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 71 Exhaust check ................................... 127 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 217 Exterior lighting see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ......................................... 99 Dipping (automatic) ......................... 99 Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 99 Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 99 Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 99 Setting ............................................. 99 Storing settings (memory function) ................................................. 99 Storing the parking position ............. 99 Eyeglasses compartment ................. 197 F Features ............................................. 198 Filler cap see Fuel filler flap Filling capacities (Technical data) ... 275 Flat tire Changing a wheel/mounting the spare wheel ................................... 261 MOExtended tires .......................... 221 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 220 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 222 Floormats ........................................... 206 Fuel Additives ........................................ 277 Consumption statistics .................. 164 Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 164 Displaying the range ...................... 164 Driving tips .................................... 127 Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 276 Important safety notes .................. 276 Problem (malfunction) ................... 125 Refueling ........................................ 122 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 276 Fuel filler flap Opening ......................................... Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ Problem (malfunction) ................... Fuses Allocation chart ............................. Before changing ............................. Dashboard fuse box ....................... Engine emergency stop ................. Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell .......................................... Fuse box in the trunk ..................... Important safety notes .................. 123 164 276 125 236 235 235 237 236 236 236 235 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... 206 General notes ................................ 203 Important safety notes .................. 204 Opening/closing the garage door .. 206 Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 204 Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 204 Gasoline ............................................. 276 Gear or selector lever (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 218 Genuine parts ...................................... 23 Glove box ........................................... 197 Google™ Local Search see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 H HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 86 Hazard warning lamps ...................... 102 Head bags Display message ............................ 170 Head restraints Adjusting (rear) ................................ 98 Index Head-up display Adjusting the brightness ................ 164 Function/notes ............................. 162 Important safety notes .................. 162 Setting the position ....................... 164 Storing settings (memory function) ................................................. 99 Switching on or off ......................... 162 Switching the display on/off ......... 164 Headlamps Fogging up ..................................... 102 see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 104 Display message ............................ 165 Switching on/off ........................... 103 Hill start assist .................................. 118 HOLD function Activating ....................................... 139 Deactivating ................................... 139 Function/notes ............................. 138 Home address see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 Hood Closing ........................................... 211 Display message ............................ 176 Important safety notes .................. 210 Opening ......................................... 210 Horn ...................................................... 32 Hydroplaning ..................................... 128 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 75 Indicator and warning lamps COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS .............................................. 184 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 33 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34 Instrument cluster lighting ................ 35 Intelligent Light System Display message ............................ 165 Interior lighting Automatic control .......................... 105 Emergency lighting ........................ 105 Manual control ............................... 105 Overview ........................................ 105 Reading lamp ................................. 105 iPod® see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 J Jack Using ............................................. 263 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 229 K Key positions SmartKey ....................................... 115 Start/Stop button .......................... 115 KEYLESS-GO Deactivation ..................................... 79 Display message ............................ 165 Locking ............................................ 79 Unlocking ......................................... 79 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 121 Manual drive program .................... 122 Knee bag .............................................. 50 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ................................................ License plate lamp (display message) ................................................... Light function, active Display message ............................ Light sensor (display message) ....... 63 165 165 165 11 12 Index Lights Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 104 Automatic headlamp mode ............ 103 Cornering light function ................. 103 Driving abroad ............................... 102 Hazard warning lamps ................... 102 High beam flasher .......................... 103 High-beam headlamps ................... 103 Light switch ................................... 102 Low-beam headlamps .................... 103 Parking lamps ................................ 103 Setting exterior lighting ................. 102 Standing lamps .............................. 103 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 164 Switching the spotlight on/off ....... 164 Turn signals ................................... 103 see Replacing bulbs Loading guidelines ............................ 196 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 82 Emergency locking ........................... 83 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 82 Locking centrally see Central locking Low-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 165 Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ........................................ 102 Switching on/off ........................... 103 Lumbar support Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .................................................. 98 M M+S tires ............................................ 242 Magic Body Control ........................... 140 MAGIC SKY CONTROL ......................... 93 Malfunction message see Display messages Matte finish (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 217 MBC see Magic Body Control mbrace Call priority .................................... 203 Display message ............................ 165 Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 199 Downloading routes ....................... 199 Emergency call .............................. 200 General notes ................................ 199 Geo fencing ................................... 199 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 199 MB info call button ........................ 202 Remote vehicle locking .................. 199 Roadside Assistance button .......... 201 Search & Send ............................... 199 Self-test ......................................... 199 Speed alert .................................... 199 System .......................................... 199 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 199 Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis .............................................. 199 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 199 Mechanical key Function/notes ................................ 80 Inserting .......................................... 80 Locking vehicle ................................ 83 Removing ......................................... 80 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 83 Memory card (audio) ......................... 164 Memory function ................................. 99 Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive 360°camera .................................. 146 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......... 66 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 153 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 155 Active Parking Assist ..................... 143 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 148 BAS (Brake Assist) ........................... 66 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist .................. 67 Crosswind Assist (vehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ............... 140 Crosswind Assist (vehicles without MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ........... 72 Cruise control ................................ 129 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 130 Index DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 136 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 71 General notes ................................ 129 MAGIC BODY CONTROL ................ 140 Night View Assist Plus ................... 150 PARKTRONIC ................................. 142 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 59 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 73 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 59 Rear view camera .......................... 144 ROAD SURFACE SCAN .................. 140 Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 165 Messages see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Modifying the programming (SmartKey) ........................................... 80 MOExtended tires .............................. 221 Mounting wheels Lowering the vehicle ...................... 266 Mounting a new wheel ................... 265 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 262 Raising the vehicle ......................... 263 Removing a wheel .......................... 265 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 262 MP3 Operation ....................................... 164 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 see separate operating instructions Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 160 Permanent display ......................... 164 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 161 Overview .......................................... 35 Music files see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) ............ see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. see separate operating instructions Night View Assist Plus Activating/deactivating ................. Cleaning ......................................... Function/notes ............................. Problem (malfunction) ................... Switching automatic activation on/off ............................................ Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....................................................... 164 188 151 218 150 152 164 114 O Occupant Classification System (OCS) Conditions ....................................... 51 Faults ............................................... 56 Operation ......................................... 52 System self-test ............................... 54 Occupant safety Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 60 Children in the vehicle ..................... 60 Important safety notes .................... 43 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 65 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 59 OCS Conditions ....................................... 51 Faults ............................................... 56 Operation ......................................... 52 System self-test ............................... 54 Odometer ........................................... 164 Oil see Engine oil On-board computer Assistance graphic menu ............... 164 Display messages .......................... 165 13 14 Index Displaying a service message ........ 216 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 134 Factory settings submenu ............. 164 Head-up display ............................. 162 Important safety notes .................. 160 Lighting submenu .......................... 164 Media menu ................................... 164 Menu overview .............................. 164 Message memory .......................... 165 Navigation menu ............................ 164 Operation ....................................... 161 Radio menu ................................... 164 Service menu ................................. 164 Standard display ............................ 164 Video DVD operation ..................... 164 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 27 Important safety notes .................... 26 Operating system see On-board computer Operation Digital Operator's Manual ................ 21 Operator's Manual Overview .......................................... 24 Vehicle equipment ........................... 24 Outside temperature display ........... 160 Overhead control panel ...................... 38 P Paint code number ............................ 274 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 217 Panic alarm .......................................... 42 Panorama roof ..................................... 91 Parcel net hooks ............................... 197 Parking Important safety notes .................. 125 Parking brake ................................ 126 Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ................................. 99 Rear view camera .......................... 144 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid Active Parking Assist ..................... 143 see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking assistance see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Display message ............................ 165 Electric parking brake .................... 126 Parking lamps Switching on/off ........................... 103 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 143 Driving system ............................... 142 Function/notes ............................. 142 Important safety notes .................. 142 Problem (malfunction) ................... 143 Range of the sensors ..................... 142 Warning display ............................. 143 PASSENGER AIR BAG Indicator lamps ................................ 43 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp Problem (malfunction) ................... 172 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 65 Phone book see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 218 Power locks ......................................... 82 Power washers .................................. 217 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Operation ......................................... 59 PRE-SAFE® Brake Activating/deactivating ................. 164 Function/notes ................................ 73 Important safety notes .................... 73 Warning lamp ................................. 184 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) Operation ......................................... 59 Program selector button .................. 121 Protection against theft ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 76 Immobilizer ...................................... 75 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 23 Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 118 Index General notes ................................ 118 Hill start assist ............................... 118 Q QR code Rescue card ..................................... 29 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27 R Radio Selecting a station ......................... 164 see separate operating instructions Radio mode see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle Declaration of conformity ................ 27 Reading lamp ..................................... 105 Rear compartment Stowage compartment .................. 197 Rear fog lamp Display message ............................ 165 Rear lamps see Lights Rear seats Overview .......................................... 40 Rear view camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 217 Function/notes ............................. 144 Switching on/off ........................... 145 Rear window blind ............................ 198 Rear window defroster Problem (malfunction) ................... 111 Switching on/off ........................... 111 Rear-view mirror Anti-glare (manual) .......................... 99 Dipping (automatic) ......................... 99 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) Important safety notes .................. 280 Refueling Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Important safety notes .................. 122 Refueling process .......................... 123 see Fuel Remote control Garage door opener ....................... 203 Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 204 Replacing bulbs General notes ................................ 105 Reporting safety defects .................... 28 Rescue card ......................................... 29 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 165 Warning lamp ................................. 176 Residual heat (climate control) ........ 111 Restraint system Display message ............................ 170 Introduction ..................................... 42 Warning lamp ................................. 182 Warning lamp (function) ................... 43 Reversing feature Roller sunblind ................................. 91 Side windows ................................... 90 Trunk lid ........................................... 84 Reversing lamps (display message) ................................................... 165 ROAD SURFACE SCAN ....................... 140 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 25 Roller sunblind Panorama roof ................................. 91 Rear window .................................. 198 Roller sunblind for the panorama roof Opening and closing ........................ 92 Operating ......................................... 91 Resetting ......................................... 92 Roof Display message ............................ 165 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 218 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 281 Route (navigation) see Route guidance (navigation) Route guidance see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 Route guidance (navigation) ............ 164 15 16 Index S Safety Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 51 see Operating safety Safety system see Driving safety systems SD memory card see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 Search & Send see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 47 Cleaning ......................................... 218 Correct usage .................................. 45 Fastening ......................................... 46 Important safety guidelines ............. 44 Introduction ..................................... 44 Releasing ......................................... 47 Warning lamp ................................. 177 Warning lamp (function) ................... 48 Seating Seating comfort package ................. 98 Seating comfort package ................... 98 Seats Active multicontour seat .................. 98 Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98 Adjusting the 4 way lumbar support .................................................. 98 Cleaning the cover ......................... 218 Correct driver's seat position ........... 96 Important safety notes .................... 97 Seat heating .................................... 98 Seat heating problem ...................... 99 Storing settings (memory function) ................................................. 99 Switching seat heating on/off ......... 98 Switching seat ventilation on/off .... 98 Section Wheels and tires ............................ 240 Selector lever see Automatic transmission Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 217 Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 164 Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 278 Coolant (engine) ............................ 279 Engine oil ....................................... 277 Fuel ................................................ 276 Important safety notes .................. 275 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) ............................................... 280 Washer fluid ................................... 280 Setting the air distribution ............... 111 Setting the airflow ............................ 111 Setting the date/time format see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 Setting the language see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 Setting the time see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 164 On-board computer ....................... 164 Side impact air bag ............................. 50 Side marker lamp (display message) ................................................... 165 Side windows Cleaning ......................................... 217 Important safety information ........... 89 Opening/closing (all) ....................... 90 Opening/closing (front) ................... 90 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 91 Resetting ......................................... 90 SIRIUS services see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 SmartKey Changing the battery ....................... 81 Changing the programming ............. 80 Checking the battery ....................... 81 Display message ............................ 165 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 79 Important safety notes .................... 78 KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 80 Loss ................................................. 82 Index Mechanical key ................................ 80 Overview .......................................... 78 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 115 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 82 Starting the engine ........................ 118 SMS see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 Snow chains ...................................... 242 Sockets Center console .............................. 198 General notes ................................ 198 Rear compartment ......................... 198 Trunk ............................................. 198 Special seat belt retractor .................. 61 Specialist workshop ............................ 27 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speedometer In the Instrument cluster ................. 33 Selecting the unit of measurement .............................................. 164 see Instrument cluster Standing lamps Display message ............................ 165 Switching on/off ........................... 103 Start/Stop button Removing ....................................... 117 Starting the engine ........................ 118 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ................................ 117 STEER CONTROL .................................. 75 Steering Warning lamps ............................... 186 Steering (display message) .............. 176 Steering Assist (DISTRONIC PLUS) Display message ............................ 165 Steering assistant STEER CONTROL see STEER CONTROL Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 99 Button overview ............................... 35 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 161 Important safety notes .................... 99 Paddle shifters ............................... 121 Steering wheel heating .................... 99 Storing settings (memory function) ................................................. 99 Steering wheel (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 218 Steering wheel heating Switching on/off .............................. 99 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 121 Stowage areas ................................... 196 Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. 197 Center console .............................. 197 Center console in rear compartment .............................................. 197 Cup holders ................................... 198 Door ............................................... 197 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 197 Glove box ....................................... 197 Important safety information ......... 196 Rear ............................................... 197 Rear seat backrest ......................... 197 Stowage net ................................... 197 Stowage net ....................................... 197 Stowage space Parcel net retainers ....................... 197 Securing a load .............................. 197 Stowage well beneath the trunk floor .................................................... 197 Summer tires In winter ........................................ 242 Sun visor ............................................ 198 Suspension tuning Active Body Control ABC ............... 140 AIRMATIC ...................................... 141 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ................................................. 111 T Tachometer ........................................ 160 Tail lamps Display message ............................ 165 see Lights Tank content Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Technical data Capacities ...................................... 275 Information .................................... 274 17 18 Index Tires/wheels ................................. Vehicle data ................................... Telephone Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. Number from the phone book ........ Redialing ........................................ Rejecting/ending a call ................. see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. Temperature Setting (climate control) ................ Tire pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Checking manually ........................ Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. Maximum ....................................... Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Notes ............................................. Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure electronically ........................................ Function/notes ............................. General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor ........................... Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... TIREFIT kit .......................................... Tires Aspect ratio (definition) ................. Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... Bar (definition) ............................... Changing a wheel .......................... Characteristics .............................. Checking ........................................ Curb weight (definition) ................. Definition of terms ......................... Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) ............................ 266 281 164 164 164 164 188 111 246 246 175 246 245 223 244 224 243 248 246 246 246 249 248 185 248 222 260 259 259 261 259 241 260 259 262 175 261 DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) ............................. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................... GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ..................................... GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ........................................... GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) .............................. Important safety notes .................. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... Labeling (overview) ........................ Load bearing index (definition) ...... Load index ..................................... Load index (definition) ................... Maximum load on a tire (definition) ............................................... Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ..................................... Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) ............................. Maximum tire load ......................... Maximum tire load (definition) ....... MOExtended tires .......................... Optional equipment weight (definition) ............................................ PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ........................................... Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... Sidewall (definition) ....................... Speed rating (definition) ................ Storing ........................................... Structure and characteristics (definition) ..................................... Summer tires in winter .................. Temperature .................................. TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) ..................................... Tire bead (definition) ...................... Tire pressure (definition) ................ Tire pressures (recommended) ...... Tire size (data) ............................... Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... 259 258 259 260 260 240 259 260 255 261 258 260 260 260 260 258 260 242 261 260 261 242 261 260 262 259 242 255 261 261 260 259 266 255 Index Tire tread ....................................... 241 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 261 Total load limit (definition) ............. 261 Traction ......................................... 254 Traction (definition) ....................... 261 Tread wear ..................................... 254 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...................................... 254 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .................... 259 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 261 Wheel and tire combination ........... 268 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 259 see Flat tire Top Tether ............................................ 63 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 234 Important safety notes .................. 232 Towing away Important safety guidelines ........... 232 Installing the towing eye ................ 233 Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 234 Removing the towing eye ............... 233 With both axles on the ground ....... 233 With the rear axle raised ................ 234 Towing eye ......................................... 220 Traffic reports see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 Traffic Sign Assist Activating/deactivating the warning function .................................... 164 Display message ............................ 165 Transfer case ..................................... 122 Transmission see Automatic transmission Transporting the vehicle .................. 234 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 218 Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. 164 Trip odometer Calling up ....................................... 164 Trunk Emergency release .......................... 88 Important safety notes .................... 84 Locking separately ........................... 88 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 87 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 85 Opening/closing (from outside, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 86 Power closing .................................. 82 Trunk lid Display message ............................ 165 Obstacle recognition ........................ 84 Opening dimensions ...................... 281 Opening/closing .............................. 84 Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 281 Turn signals Display message ............................ 165 Switching on/off ........................... 103 TV see Separate operating instructions Two-way radio Windshield (infrared reflective) ...... 198 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate U Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 83 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 82 V Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 199 Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 28 Data acquisition ............................... 29 Display message ............................ 176 Equipment ....................................... 24 Limited Warranty ............................. 28 Loading .......................................... 249 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 83 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 79 Lowering ........................................ 266 Maintenance .................................... 25 Operating safety .............................. 26 Parking for a long period ................ 126 Pulling away ................................... 118 Raising ........................................... 263 Reporting problems ......................... 28 19 20 Index Securing from rolling away ............ 262 Towing away .................................. 232 Transporting .................................. 234 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 83 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 79 Vehicle data ................................... 281 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 281 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 83 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 274 Vehicle level Active Body Control ABC ............... 140 Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle tool kit .................................. 220 Video see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 188 Video (DVD) ........................................ 164 VIN ...................................................... 274 Voice Control System see Separate operating instructions W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 179 Brakes ........................................... 178 Check Engine ................................. 176 Coolant .......................................... 183 Distance warning ........................... 184 ESP® .............................................. 181 ESP® OFF ....................................... 182 General notes ................................ 176 Overview .......................................... 34 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 43 Reserve fuel ................................... 176 Restraint system ............................ 182 Seat belt ........................................ 177 Steering ......................................... 186 Tire pressure monitor .................... 185 Warranty .............................................. 24 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 165 Wheel and tire combination see Tires Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 266 Wheel chock ...................................... 262 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 261 Checking ........................................ 241 Cleaning ......................................... 217 Important safety notes .................. 240 Interchanging/changing ................ 261 Mounting a new wheel ................... 265 Mounting a wheel .......................... 262 Removing a wheel .......................... 265 Storing ........................................... 262 Tightening torque ........................... 266 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 266 Window curtain air bag Operation ......................................... 51 Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting ...................................... 111 Infrared reflective .......................... 198 Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ....................... 215 Notes ............................................. 280 Windshield wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... 107 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 106 Switching on/off ........................... 106 Winter driving Important safety notes .................. 242 Slippery road surfaces ................... 128 Snow chains .................................. 242 Winter operation Summer tires ................................. 242 Winter tires M+S tires ....................................... 242 Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... 217 Important safety notes .................. 106 Replacing ....................................... 106 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 218 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Digital Operator's Manual Introduction The printed Operator's Manual provides information about the safe operation of your vehicle. The Digital Operator's Manual additionally describes further functions and equipment installed in your vehicle. The vehicle functions and functions of COMAND are described in the Digital Operator's Manual. You can call up the Digital Operator's Manual via COMAND. i You will not incur any costs when calling up the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital Operator's Manual works without connecting to the Internet. There are three ways to access the topics of the Digital Operator's Manual: RVisual search The visual search allows you to explore your vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can access many of the different topics covered by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehicle interior" view. RKeyword Search The keyword search allows you to search for a keyword by entering characters. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual in the "COMAND" section under the "Character entry (telephony)" keyword. RContents You can select individual sections in the contents. Operation Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Press the Ø button in the center console. The overview relating to the vehicle opens. X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by turning 3 or sliding 1 the controller. X Confirm 7 the message about the warning and safety notes. The basic menu for the Digital Operator's Manual opens. X Operating the Digital Operator's Manual General notes Please observe the information about the operation of the controller (Y page 192). Content pages The content pages can be accessed by means of a visual search, a keyword search or using the contents. i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated for safety reasons while driving. To scroll forward/backward: turn 3 the controller. X To display in full-screen/animation: slide 8 the controller to the left :. X 21 Digital Operator's Manual 22 To select information texts/save bookmarks: slide 9 the controller to the right ;. X To select a link: slide 6 the controller downwards =. X To exit a content page: actuate the % ? symbol. X To call up the basic menu of the Digital Operator's Manual: actuate symbol Þ A. X To switch functions to COMAND using the buttons on the center console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø button. The selected menu opens. The Digital Operator's Manual remains open in the background. X Introduction Protection of the environment General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. make sure that the tire pressures are correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Ralways Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Ravoid Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. off the engine in stationary traffic. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rswitch Environmental concerns and recommendations Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars sills Rseats Rcockpit Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Rdoor Z 23 24 Introduction You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should therefore be used. More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine MercedesBenz parts (Y page 274). Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Service and vehicle operation Warranty The implied warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty System Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws) Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. REmission i Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you. Introduction Information for customers in California Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair, (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days. Please send your written notice to: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Maintenance The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals. Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in your vehicle literature portfolio. Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in Z 25 26 Introduction the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: Rservice facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses. In the USA Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb or a hole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage or parts of the chassis Introduction In situations like this, the body, the undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Declarations of conformity Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to the diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of the vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety. Z 27 28 Introduction Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifications Rwork on electronic components Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Technical Data section in this manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Rthe Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov Limited Warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Introduction QR codes for the rescue card The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information at https:// portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com. Data stored in the vehicle Data recording This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic information relating to vehicle operation, malfunctions, and user settings. This may include information about the performance or status of various systems, including but not limited to, engine, throttle, steering or brake systems, that is stored and can be read out with suitable devices, particularly when the vehicle is serviced. The data obtained is used to properly diagnose and service your vehicle or to further optimize and develop vehicle functions. COMAND/mbrace If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicle’s operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace system. For additional information please refer to the COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions. Event data recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as during air bag deployment or when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: Rhow various systems in your vehicle are operating Rwhether or not the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, can combine the EDR data with the type of personal identification data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. Z 29 30 Introduction MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. Information on copyright General information Information on license for free and opensource software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource 31 Cockpit ................................................. 32 Multifunction steering wheel ............. 35 Center console .................................... 37 Overhead control panel ...................... 38 Door control panel .............................. 39 Rear seats ............................................ 40 At a glance Instrument cluster .............................. 33 32 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit : Function Page Steering wheel paddle shifters ~ ; Combination switch = Horn ? Instrument cluster A DIRECT SELECT lever B Overhead control panel C Control panel for: Ü Lowering the rear seat head restraints Extending/retracting the rear roller sunblind Moves the seat-belt extender forwards PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp Setting the brightness of the instrument cluster lighting and the COMAND display D Climate control systems Function Page E Ignition lock Start/Stop button 103 F Adjusts the steering wheel Steering wheel heating 33 G Cruise control lever 130 120 H Electric parking brake 126 38 I Diagnostics connection J Opens the hood 210 K Light switch 102 L Control panel for: Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist Deactivating PARKTRONIC Switching on the 360° camera Activating Night View Assist Switching on the head-up display ~ 198 46 43 ~ 110 115 115 ~ ~ 27 136 155 142 146 150 ~ Instrument cluster 33 Instrument cluster Function At a glance Displays and controls Page Function Page ~ : Speedometer ? Coolant temperature ; Multifunction display with outside temperature display A Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indicator 8 ~ Tachometer ~ = Fuel filler flap location indicator 8: the fuel filler cap is on the right-hand side. 34 Instrument cluster At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function Page : ! ABS 179 ; å ESP® OFF ÷ ESP® 181 181 E Function Page ! Electric parking brake (yellow) ~ F Electric parking brake (red) F USA only ! Canada only G ; Check Engine 176 H Ð Power steering 186 ~ I 178 T Parking lamps, license plate lamp and instrument cluster lighting Brakes (red) $ USA only J Canada only 103 J ü Seat belt 177 C ! Turn signal, right 103 K 6 Restraint system 182 D · Distance warning signal 184 L h Tire pressure monitor 185 = # Turn signal, left ~ ? L Low-beam headlamps ~ A B K High-beam headlamps ~ Multifunction steering wheel 35 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function Page : Multifunction display ~ ; Sets the brightness of the instrument cluster lighting and the COMAND display = COMAND display; see the separate COMAND operating instructions ? CD and DVD player/ changer; see the separate COMAND operating instructions A COMAND controller and buttons; see the separate COMAND operating instructions ~ Function B ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits phone book/redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute ó Switches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions Page ~ 36 Multifunction steering wheel At a glance Function C ò Calls up the main menu 9: Selects a menu/submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms your selection Hides display messages % Back ñ Switches off the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions Page ~ ~ ~ ~ Center console 37 At a glance Center console Function Page : Switches COMAND on/off ~ ; Adjusts the volume/mute ~ = è ECO start/stop function ~ Touchpad Telephone keypad ~ ~ A É Sets the vehicle level 140, 140 B Adjusts the suspension settings 140, 140 C Û Selects the drive program/program selector button Ñ Selects the drive program/program selector button (AMG vehicles) ? Function Page D Back button ~ E Seat adjustment button ~ F Navigation button ~ G Radio button ~ H £ Hazard warning lamps I Media button ~ J Telephone, address book and Internet button ~ Vehicle and system settings button ~ COMAND controller ~ K 121 121 L 102 38 Overhead control panel At a glance Overhead control panel Function Page p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off ~ | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off ~ = G SOS button (mbrace system) 200 G ? c Switches the front interior lighting on/off Buttons for the garage door opener ~ H u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off ~ Microphone for mbrace (emergency call system), telephone and the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions I F Breakdown assistance call button (mbrace system) : ; A Function F B p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off C ï MB Info call button (mbrace system) 202 D Eyeglasses compartment ~ E Operates the roller sunblind for the panorama roof 105 91 µ Operates MAGIC SKY CONTROL Vehicles without MAGIC SKY CONTROL: operates the roller sunblind for the panorama roof Page 93 91 204 201 Door control panel 39 At a glance Door control panel Function Page : s Seat ventilation ~ ; c Seat heating ~ = w Adjusts the frontpassenger seat from the driver's seat ? A B r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel Adjusts the seats electrically 7Zª\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically Function Page W Opens/closes the right side window ~ W Opens/closes the rear right side window ~ E p Opens/closes the trunk lid 87 F W Opens/closes the rear left side window ~ G Opens the door ~ H % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle ~ W Opens/closes the left side window ~ C D ~ 99 ~ I ~ 40 Rear seats At a glance Rear seats : ; Function Page Stowage box in the seat backrest Coolbox ~ ~ Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest ~ Function Page = Cup holder ~ ? Stowage compartment in the center console Socket ~ ~ 41 Useful information .............................. 42 Panic alarm .......................................... 42 Occupant safety .................................. 42 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 65 Driving safety systems ....................... 65 Protection against theft ..................... 75 Safety Children in the vehicle ........................ 60 Occupant safety 42 Safety Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 27). Panic alarm To activate: press ! button : for at least one second. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. or X Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. X Occupant safety Restraint system: introduction The restraint system reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. The restraint system comprises: RSeat belt system bags RChild restraint system RChild seat securing systems The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants: RAir Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (Y page 45) Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint properly (Y page 97). As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 96). You also have to make sure that an air bag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 48). An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if, in the event of an accident, the protection offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only the air bags that increase protection in that particular accident situation are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 57). For more information about children traveling with you in the vehicle and on child restraint systems, see "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 60). Important safety notes G WARNING Modifications to the restraint system may cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function and may fail in an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1 800 367 6372). Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running G WARNING If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or air bag, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classification System (OCS). The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF : lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON ; lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed. Depending on the person in the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag must either be deactivated or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age Z 43 Safety Occupant safety Safety 44 Occupant safety and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe the notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 60). There you will also find instructions on rearward and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: depending on the classification of the person in the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated (Y page 51). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts“ (Y page 44) and "Air bags" (Y page 48). There you can also find information on the correct seat position. Seat belts Introduction Seat belts are the most effective means of restricting the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the air bag. The seat belt system comprises: RSeat belts REmergency Tensioning Devices and seat belt force limiters If the seat belt is pulled by the seat belt extender quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extracted any further. The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close against the body. However it does not pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction of the backrest. The Emergency Tensioning Device does not correct an incorrect seat position or the routing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt. When triggered, seat belt force limiters help to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags, which absorb part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occupants during an accident. ! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise lead to the triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Device in the event of an accident, which will then need to be replaced. Important safety notes The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey. Rthe G WARNING If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional injury, for example, in an accident, during braking or when abruptly changing direction. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants are seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain Occupant safety G WARNING Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot fasten the seat belt correctly without an additional suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional injury, for example, in an accident, during braking or an abrupt change of direction. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. For this reason, always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint systems. If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Children in the vehicle" section of this Operator's Manual (Y page 60) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 51) G WARNING The seat belts may not perform their intended protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleach or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels have been modified Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn out and clean. Following an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Any such modifications could invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. Proper use of the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 44). All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion. When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt buckle belonging to that seat. Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Z Safety abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. 45 46 Occupant safety Safety Rthe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the center of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down as possible across your lap. The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects. If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store these in a suitable place. Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 196). Fastening seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 44) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 45). G WARNING If the seat-belt extender is extended during the journey, the seat belt is not fitted properly on the body. The seat belt can then no longer perform its intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always make sure that the seat-belt extender is retracted during a journey. Seat-belt extender The seat-belt extender for the driver and front passenger helps you fasten your seat belt. Seat-belt extender = is extended when the respective door is closed and the SmartKey is turned to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. You can also extend seat-belt extender = with seat-belt extender button ?. X Press seat-belt extender button ?. Seat-belt extender = extends. Seat-belt extender = is retracted again if: Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle. Rthe belt tongue is not engaged in the seat belt buckle within 60 seconds. In this case, you can extend seat-belt extender = again. Press seat-belt extender button ? again. Occupant safety respective door is opened. SmartKey is turned to position 0 in the ignition lock. Ryou release the seat backrest and fold it forwards. Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied after approximately five seconds. If you press seat-belt extender button ? after this, seat-belt extender = will not extend. Releasing seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Adjust the seat (Y page 96). The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of seat-belt extender = and engage belt tongue ; into belt buckle :. The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened automatically, see "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. X All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information can be found under "Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 61). Press release button : and hold belt tongue ; firmly and guide it back towards seat belt extender =. Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This function adjusts the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle when the seat-belt extender is retracted and Rthe ignition is switched on The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain retraction force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. Z Safety Rthe Rthe 47 Safety 48 Occupant safety You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off using COMAND. Information on switching the belt adjustment function on and off can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual or in the separate COMAND operating instructions. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all occupants must fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver or front-passenger seat belt has not been fastened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts are fastened or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. This warning tone stops after six seconds or when the driver's seat belt is fastened. If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) once and the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warning is activated again. i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts" (Y page 177). Air bags Introduction The installation point of an air bag can be recognized by the AIR BAG symbol. An air bag complements the correctly fastened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The air bag provides additional protection in applicable accident situations. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems function independently from one another (Y page 57). However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury caused by an air bag due to the high speed at which the air bag must be deployed. Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not sit in the correct seat position, the air bag cannot protect as intended and could even cause additional injury when deployed. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, including pregnant women Rare sitting correctly and maintain the greatest possible distance to the air bags Rfollow the following instructions Always make sure that there are no objects between the air bag and the vehicle's occupants. RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The center of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. RFor this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under 12 years of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable child restraint systems. RChild restraint systems should be installed on the rear seats. ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated (Y page 43). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 60) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: Do not place any objects on the dashboard e.g. above the front-passenger front air bag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. G WARNING If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Z 49 Safety Occupant safety 50 Occupant safety Safety Front air bags Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering column and front-passenger knee bag ; under the glove box. The driver's and frontpassenger knee bags are triggered together with the front air bags. The driver's and front-passenger knee bags offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupants in the front seats. Side impact air bags G WARNING Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove box. When deployed, the front air bags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you about the status of the frontpassenger front air bag (Y page 43). Front-passenger front air bag ; will only deploy if: Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even prevent the deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the Occupant Classification System (OCS) could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied (Y page 51). The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit (Y page 52) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity Knee bags Front side impact air bags : and rear side impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the side impact air bag offers additional thorax protection. It also offers additional pelvis protection for occupants in the front seats. However, it does not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms Occupant safety Rthe OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied or not. Window curtain air bags Occupant Classification System (OCS) Introduction The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the frontpassenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are either enabled or deactivated. The system does not deactivate: Rthe side impact air bag window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices Rthe Prerequisite To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, OCS may produce a false classification, e.g. because the front passenger: Rin Rtransfers Window curtain air bags : are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. When deployed, the window curtain air bag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the chest or arms. In the event of a side impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 57). their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backZ Safety In the event of a side impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side (front) deploys in the following situations: 51 Occupant safety Safety 52 rest and the head restraint position accordingly. Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function correctly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Occupant Classification System operation (OCS) If the status of the front-passenger front air bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag display message appears in the instrument cluster (Y page 172). When the frontpassenger seat is occupied, always pay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamps. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front air bag both before and during the journey. G WARNING : PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or enabled. X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The system carries out self-diagnostics. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF : lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON ; lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct. G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bag may deploy in an accident. The child could be struck by the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. You can find more information on OCS under "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 56). G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON is lit up This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle seat-belt extender to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the retracted seat-belt extender. If necessary, adjust the frontpassenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. If OCS determines that: Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child of up to 12 months old in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. But in the case of a 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light up permanently after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's stature. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), either the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a person of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature should not use the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of a stature corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 60). When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivaZ 53 Safety Occupant safety Safety 54 Occupant safety ted in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the system checked by qualified technicians as soon as possible. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The front-passenger seat should only be repaired at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion is damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated. System self-test G DANGER If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The frontpassenger front air bag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G DANGER If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective func- tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the frontpassenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forwardfacing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Occupant safety Safety After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp display the status of the frontpassenger front air bag (Y page 52). For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 56). 55 Z 56 Occupant safety Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 54). Safety Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is BAG OFF indicator incorrect. lamp lights up and X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the perremains lit, even son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 51). though the frontX If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the passenger seat is occufront-passenger seat may not be used. pied by an adult or a X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized person of a stature corMercedes-Benz Center. responding to that of an adult. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up and/or does not stay on. The front-passenger seat is: OCS is malfunctioning. X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child seat. X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat. Runoccupied X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted. Roccupied by the weight of a child up X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the to 12 months old in a seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the frontchild restraint syspassenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and tem the child restraint system being pulled too tightly. X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/ or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags Important safety notes G WARNING The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended protection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced. It is important for your safety and that of your passenger to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. G WARNING Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices which have been triggered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible. If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle or open the windows as soon as it is safe to do so. Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ index.cfm. Method of operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the Emergency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or rear collision. An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be triggered, if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational; see "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 43) Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on the respective front-passenger seat The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. Z 57 Safety Occupant safety 58 Occupant safety Safety If the restraint system control unit detects a more severe accident, further components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other in certain frontal collision situations: RFront air bags as well as driver's and frontpassenger knee bags RWindow curtain air bag, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt The front-passenger front air bag is activated or deactivated depending on the person on the front-passenger seat. The frontpassenger front air bag can only deploy in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 43). Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with the maximum amount of propellant gas if a second deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds. The activation threshold of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and the air bag are determined by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration which occurs at various points in the vehicle. This process is preemptive in nature. Deployment should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment. The vehicle can be deformed considerably, without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact or that the vehicle is rolling over, the relevant restraint system components are activated independently of one another depending on the apparent type of accident. If the system determines a need for additional protection for the vehicle occupants, the Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered. RSide impact air bags on the side of impact, independently of the Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of the seat belt on the driver's seat and in the rear compartment seats The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side (front) deploys in the following situations: - the OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or - the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, independently of the use of the seat belt and independently of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations when the vehicle rolls over, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems work independently of each other. How the air bag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the apparent type of accident: Rfrontal collision impact Rrollover Rside PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection system) Introduction In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. Important safety notes ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. Despite your vehicle being equipped with the PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of personal injuries occurring as a result of an accident cannot be eliminated. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. Function PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys- ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely Rvehicles with the Driving Assistance package: when a driver assistance system intervenes powerfully or the radar sensor sys- tem detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. the vehicle skids, the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. Rif the vehicle skids, the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable position. Rvehicles with a multicontour seat: the air pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest is increased. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour seats, the air pressure in the side bolsters is reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: Rif X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary. The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Information about the convenience function can be found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47). PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection system PLUS) Introduction PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rearend collision is imminent. In certain hazardZ 59 Safety Occupant safety 60 Children in the vehicle ous situations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes preemptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. Safety Important safety notes The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannot prevent an imminent collision. The driver is not warned when PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes. PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehicle is backing up. PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not perform braking actions while the vehicle is in motion or when Parking Guidance is active. Function PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situations if the radar sensor system detects an imminent head-on or rear-end collision. PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rif the radar sensor system detects that a head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-end collision is imminent: - the brake pressure is increased if the driver applies the brakes when the vehicle is stationary. - the seat belts are pre-tensioned. The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is canceled: Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a gear is engaged Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer detected Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to pull away If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, the original settings are restored. Automatic measures after an accident Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rthe electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply is cut off Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency call Rthe Children in the vehicle Important safety notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there. If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 51) Children in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: 41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt can be fastened properly without a booster seat. Rrelease Rshift G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 44) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 45). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over Special seat belt retractor G WARNING If the seat belt is released while driving, the child restraint system will no longer be secured properly. The special seat belt retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system properly. All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once the child restraint system has been secured. Installing a child restraint system: Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Pull the front seat belt smoothly out of the seat-belt extender and the rear seat belt out of the belt outlet. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. X Activating the special seat belt retractor: Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is activated. X Push the child seat restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. X Z Safety the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. 61 Children in the vehicle 62 Removing a child restraint system/deactivating the special seat belt retractor: Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the release button on the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it to the seat-belt extender in the front or to the belt outlet in the rear. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. Safety X Child restraint system The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Rthe G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 196). G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint system again. The securing systems of child restraint systems are: Rthe seat belt system LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings Rthe Top Tether anchorages If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 51). There you will also find information on deactivating the front-passenger front air bag. Rthe Children in the vehicle 63 All child restraint systems must meet the following standards: Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system G WARNING LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. In the event of an accident, a child might not be restrained correctly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. Before every trip, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings Safety RU.S. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ; on the rear seats are covered by folding upholstered lining = with Velcro fastening. X Fold upholstered lining = upwards. X Turn support : by 90°. Upholstered lining = remains folded upwards. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ;. After you have removed the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, you must turn support : on upholstered lining = by 90° again. Then fold upholstery lining = down. ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ; for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right rear seats. Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions. Top Tether Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint sysZ Children in the vehicle 64 tem is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used. Safety Top Tether anchorages The Top Tether anchorage points are installed in the rear compartment behind the head restraints on the parcel shelf. Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X If necessary, move head restraint : back down again slightly (Y page 98). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt A. X Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat General notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install the child restraint system on a rear seat. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 51). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Move head restraint : upwards. X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Route Top Tether belt A under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. X Hook Top Tether hook ? of Top Tether belt A into Top Tether anchorage =. Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twisted. X Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-passenger seat Rthe unintentional deactivation of the frontpassenger front air bag Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard Rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 43) is the front-passenger front air bag deactivated. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Forward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the front-passenger seat-belt extender to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards from the retracted front-passenger seat seat-belt extender. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Pets in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave animals unattended or unsecured in the vehicle, they could press buttons or switches, for example. As a result, they could: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby endangering other road users Unsecured animals could also be flung around the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi- cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly during the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal transport box. Driving safety systems Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 66) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 66) RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist (Y page 67) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (distance warning function and Adaptive Brake Assist) (Y page 68) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 71) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (Y page 73) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 73) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 75) RABS Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. Z 65 Safety Driving safety systems Safety 66 Driving safety systems The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Pay particular attention to the information regarding tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires" section (Y page 240). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General information ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 65). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 179) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 166). ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi- tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. Braking If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. X If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. BAS (Brake Assist System) General information BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 65). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Braking X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Driving safety systems General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 65). BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be operational. With the help of a sensor system and a camera system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles: Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time Rthat cross the path of your vehicle In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. If the radar sensor system or the camera system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are restricted or no longer available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS. i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section“ (Y page 67). BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are assisted when braking. Important safety notes G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, BAS PLUS may: Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. G WARNING BAS PLUS does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rwhen cornering As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Rvehicles quickly moving into the radar sensor system detection range Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Rnot Z Safety BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist 67 68 Driving safety systems Rdarkness Rif: pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle - the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Safety - Function To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if: Ryou approach an obstacle, and PLUS has detected a risk of collision When driving at a speed under 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake pressure will be carried out at the last possible moment. When driving at a speed above 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the brake pressure to a value adapted to the traffic situation. BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h). RBAS At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle Robjects crossing your path and that are recognized in the detection range of the sensors i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes function as usual again, if: Ryou release the brake pedal. is no longer a risk of collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou activate kickdown. Rthere COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS General information COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and adaptive Brake Assist. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you. Important safety notes In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system Observe the notes in the section on breaking-in (Y page 114). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Distance warning function Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 65). G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the distance warning function. Rnot Function X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate the distance warning function in the on-board computer (Y page 164). If the distance warning function is not activated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphics display. The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obsta- Z 69 Safety Driving safety systems Safety 70 Driving safety systems cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. If you approach an obstacle and the distance warning function detects a risk of a collision, the system will initially alert you both visually and acoustically. Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the autonomous braking function. The autonomous braking function: Rgives the driver more time to react to critical driving situations Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or Rreduces the effects of an accident The autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: Rfrom 5 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph (105 km/h) for moving objects Rfrom 5 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph (50 km/h) for stationary objects If the autonomous braking function requires a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. Adaptive Brake Assist i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 65). Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of observation. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to stationary obstacles. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 65). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 65). away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP®. Important safety notes G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 234) when towing the vehicle with a raised rear axle. ESP® is only deactivated if the å warning lamp is lit continuously. If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 181) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 166). Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Characteristics of ESP® General information If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull Z 71 Safety Driving safety systems Driving safety systems 72 cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. If ESP® intervenes: Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Safety X ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. Deactivating/activating ESP® Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 65). You can select between the following states of ESP®: RESP® RESP® is activated. is deactivated. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Rin i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi- ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. Deactivating/activating ESP® You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-board computer. X To deactivate: (Y page 72). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To activate: (Y page 72). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake. Rengine Crosswind Assist (vehicles without MAGIC BODY CONTROL) General information Vehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL: information on stabilizing the vehicle in the event of crosswind (Y page 140). Strong crosswinds can cause your vehicle to deviate from a straight course. The crosswind driving assistance function integrated into ESP® significantly reduces these effects. Driving safety systems Important safety notes Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) General information EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 65). G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 179) as well as display messages (Y page 169). ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 138) and hill start assist (Y page 118). PRE-SAFE® Brake General information i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 65). PRE SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be switched on and be operational. With the help of the radar sensor system and the camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section“ (Y page 73). PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. Important safety notes G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you brake yourself. Even after subsequent full application of the brakes Z Safety ESP® intervenes automatically according to the direction and intensity of the crosswinds affecting your vehicle. ESP intervenes with stabilizing braking to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane. Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering gently. 73 Safety 74 Driving safety systems a collision cannot always be avoided, particularly when approaching at too high a speed. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions: Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seat belts fastened and Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h) At a speed of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto Rto crossing traffic cornering Rwhen As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Rif: - pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle - the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Protection against theft Function X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 164). If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display. Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. i If there is an increased risk of collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated. If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up to the point of full brake application. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an imminent accident. You can prevent the intervention of the PRESAFE® Brake at any time by: Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further. Ractivating kickdown. Rreleasing the brake pedal. The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. is no longer a risk of collision. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle. Rthere STEER CONTROL General information STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering assistance is provided in particular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake. Rthe vehicle starts to skid. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 65). No steering support is provided from STEER CONTROL, if: RESP® is malfunctioning. lighting is faulty. Power steering will, however, continue to function. Rthe Protection against theft Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. Z Safety Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 75 Protection against theft 76 Safety When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ATA (anti-theft alarm system) X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey: press the % or & button on the SmartKey. The alarm is switched off. or Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. X X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example. To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 15 seconds. X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Ra door vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe trunk lid Rthe hood Rthe i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically sends a message to the Customer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends the message or data provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service. Rthe mbrace service has been activated properly. Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available. 77 Useful information .............................. 78 SmartKey ............................................. 78 Doors .................................................... 82 Trunk .................................................... 84 Side windows ...................................... 89 Opening and closing Panorama roof ..................................... 91 78 SmartKey Opening and closing Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 27). SmartKey Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do not keep the SmartKey on the parcel shelf or in the trunk. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine using the Start/Stop button. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine driving Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing Rwhilst SmartKey SmartKey functions 79 KEYLESS-GO General notes Locking/unlocking centrally : & To lock the vehicle ; F To open/close the trunk lid = % To unlock the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press button =. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. anti-theft alarm system is armed again. Rthe X To lock centrally: press button :. The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors trunk lid Rthe fuel filler flap The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking. Rthe i You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using COMAND (see the Digital Operating Instructions). You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the SmartKey. The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine driving Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing Rwhilst i When the surround lighting is activated in COMAND, it comes on when it is dark after the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control. Information on activating and deactivating the surround lighting can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. X To open the trunk lid automatically from outside the vehicle: press and hold button ; until the trunk lid opens. Z Opening and closing Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle. SmartKey 80 To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface : or ;. Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. Opening and closing X Deactivating If you do not intend to use the vehicle for a longer period of time, you can deactivate KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby. X To deactivate: press the & button on the SmartKey twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp of the SmartKey lights up twice briefly and KEYLESS-GO is deactivated. X To activate: press any button on the SmartKey or insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again. Mechanical key General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 76). If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Removing the mechanical key X KEYLESS-GO start function Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle. Changing the settings of the locking system You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. For further information about: Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 83) the trunk (Y page 88) Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 83) Runlocking Inserting the mechanical key X Push mechanical key ; completely into the SmartKey until it engages and release catch : is back in its basic position. SmartKey SmartKey battery 81 Checking the battery G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries. The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ index.cfm. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Change the battery (Y page 81). i If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: X Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle i You can get a battery at any qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 80). X Press mechanical key ; into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : Z Opening and closing Important safety notes Doors 82 Opening and closing opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover : closed while doing so. X Remove battery compartment cover :. Doors Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants. X X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing first and then press to close it. Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey. X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle. X Problems with the SmartKey You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Rshifting You should preferably place luggage or loads in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 196). Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RUnlocking and opening doors from the inside RCentrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside RAutomatic locking feature RPower closing Doors If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 80). Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 80). X Carefully press the protective cap onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated firmly. Do not pull the door handle when doing so. X If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 76). Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) Insert the mechanical key into opening : in the protective cap. X Pull and hold the door handle. X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. X Release the door handle. X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The locking knob pops up and the door unlocks. If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door and the trunk lid. X Press the locking button (Y page 82). X Check whether the locking knob on the front-passenger door is still visible. Press the locking knob down by hand, if necessary. X Close the driver's door. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 80). X Insert the mechanical key into opening : in the protective cap. X Pull and hold the door handle. X Z Opening and closing Unlocking the driver's door (mechanical key) 83 Trunk 84 Pull the protective cap on the mechanical key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. X Release the door handle. Opening and closing X larly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. i You can limit the opening angle of the trunk lid in COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The locking knob drops down and the driver's door is locked. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid are locked. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 80). X Carefully press the protective cap onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated firmly. Do not pull the door handle when doing so. X i If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The antitheft alarm system is not armed. Trunk Important safety notes G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- i The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 281). Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You could otherwise lock yourself out. You should preferably place luggage or loads in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 196). Obstacle recognition with trunk lid reversing feature On vehicles with trunk lid remote closing feature, the trunk lid is equipped with automatic obstacle recognition with reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the trunk lid when automatically opening or closing, this procedure is stopped. If the trunk lid is stopped during the closing procedure, it will open again automatically. The automatic obstacle recognition with reversing feature is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when opening and closing the trunk lid. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing movement Trunk Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door or Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid Opening/closing automatically from outside Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress the F button on the SmartKey. Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. i The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 281). Opening You can open the trunk lid automatically using the SmartKey. X Press and hold the F button on the SmartKey until the trunk lid opens. Closing You can close the trunk lid automatically using the SmartKey or the closing button in the trunk lid. X Press and release closing button : on the trunk lid. or If the SmartKey is located in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle: press the F button on the SmartKey. You can release the button as soon as the trunk lid starts to close. X To stop the closing process: RPress the F button on the SmartKey, or RPress closing button : or locking button ; on the trunk lid, or X Z Opening and closing This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: 85 Trunk 86 Opening and closing RPress the remote operating switch on the driver's door, or RIn vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick into the sensor detection range under the bumper with your foot. i If the F button on the SmartKey is pressed or HANDS-FREE ACCESS is initiated after the closing process is stopped, the trunk lid opens. Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO: when all the doors are closed, you can simultaneously close the trunk lid and lock the vehicle. The key must be located to the rear of the vehicle. Press and release locking button ; on the trunk lid. If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside the vehicle, the trunk lid closes and the vehicle locks. i If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk, the trunk lid opens again after it is closed. If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey outside the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed. X Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. General notes With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you can open or close the trunk lid or stop the procedure without using your hands. This is useful if you have your hands full. To do this, make a kicking movement under the bumper with your foot. Observe the following points: RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your person. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. RWhen making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground and that there is sufficient clearance to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise lose your balance e.g. on ice. HANDS-FREE ACCESS Important safety notes G WARNING The vehicle's exhaust system may be very hot. You could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always ensure that you only make the kicking movement within the detection range of sensors. ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk: Rusing Rusing a car wash a power washer RAlways ensure that you only make the kick- ing movement within the detection range of sensors :. RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the rear area while doing so. RDo not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. Otherwise, the sensors may not function correctly. RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function when the engine is started. RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDFREE ACCESS could be triggered. The trunk Trunk Operation If the trunk lid closing procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the trunk lid will open. If the trunk lid opening procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the trunk lid will close. Opening/closing automatically from inside Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress X To open/close: kick into sensor detection range : under the bumper with your foot. You will hear a warning tone while the trunk lid is opening or closing. If the trunk lid does not open after several attempts: wait at least ten seconds then move your leg under the bumper once again. i If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long, the trunk lid does not open or close. Repeat the leg movement more quickly if this occurs. To stop the opening or closing procedure: X Rkick with your leg in the sensor detection range : under the bumper or Rpress the closing button in the trunk lid or Rpress the F button on the SmartKey the F button on the SmartKey. or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. Rpull G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. Z Opening and closing lid could thus be opened or closed unintentionally, for example, if you: - sit on the edge of the trunk. - set something down or lift something up behind the vehicle. - polish the rear of the vehicle. Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your person in these situations or in situations similar to these. This will prevent the unintentional opening/closing of the trunk. RDirt caused by road salt around sensors : may restrict functionality. RUsing the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a prosthetic leg may restrict functionality. 87 88 Trunk i The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 281). Opening and closing Opening and closing Activating the function to lock the trunk separately: Close the trunk lid. Open the glove box. X Push the switch to position ;. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk remains locked. i You can also lock the glove box (Y page 197). Deactivating the function to lock the trunk separately: X X X X You can open and close the trunk lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. X To open: pull remote operating switch for trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens. X To close: press remote operating switch for trunk lid : until the trunk lid is completely closed. Locking the trunk separately You can lock the trunk separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains locked and cannot be opened. Open the glove box. Push the switch to position :. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk will also be unlocked. Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key) ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. If the trunk lid can no longer be unlocked: Rusing the SmartKey, or HANDS-FREE ACCESS, or Rusing the remote operating switch in the door control panel: Use the emergency release. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 80). X Fold down the rear seat armrest. Rusing X Pull handle : and fold down cover ;. Side windows 89 Trunk emergency release X Slide the tip of the mechanical key into opening = and turn. The lock cover is levered off. X Press emergency release button : briefly. The trunk lid unlocks and opens. The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunk lid emergency release when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. The trunk lid emergency release does not unlock the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or discharged. Trunk lid emergency release light: 1 Basic position 2 To unlock Insert the mechanical key into the lock as far as the stop. X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise from position 1 as far as it will go to position 2. The trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly. X Turn the mechanical key back to position 1 and remove it. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. X Close the lock cover. X X X Swing cover ; upwards until it engages. Fold up the rear seat armrest. i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 83), the trunk is also locked. Remergency release button : flashes for 30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened Remergency release button : flashes for 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again. Z Opening and closing You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside with the emergency release button. Opening and closing 90 Side windows G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Side window reversing feature The front side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts one of the front side windows from traveling upwards during the automatic closing process, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing a side window. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rwhile resetting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: ROpening and closing the side windows opening RConvenience closing feature RResetting the side windows RConvenience Panorama roof 91 Problems with the side windows If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. Remove the objects. X Close the side window. X A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again be closed and you can- slightly: not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Panorama roof If somebody becomes trapped: Operating the roller sunblind for the panorama roof Rrelease Important safety notes G WARNING When opening or closing the roller sunblind, parts of the body could be trapped between the roller sunblind and the frame. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. Rduring The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior from sunlight. Roller sunblind reversing feature The roller sunblind is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind automatically Z Opening and closing G WARNING Panorama roof 92 Opening and closing opens again a little. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attention when closing the roller sunblind. G WARNING The reversing feature especially does not react to soft, light and thin objects such as small fingers. This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The closing process is stopped. Rduring Opening and closing the roller sunblind direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again. Vehicles without MAGIC SKY CONTROL: you can also start and cancel automatic operation using button :. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X Press button :. RIf the roller sunblind is completely closed, it is automatically opened fully. RIf the roller sunblind is not completely closed, it is automatically closed fully. RIf the roller sunblind is in motion, automatic operation is canceled. Resetting the roller sunblind for the panorama roof : Opens ; Opens = Closes Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X Press the 3 switch in direction : or pull it in direction ;. The roller sunblind opens. X Pull the 3 switch in direction =. The roller sunblind closes. i If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding X Reset the roller sunblind if it does not operate smoothly. Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow : until the roller sunblind is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Make sure that the roller sunblind (Y page 91) can be opened fully again. X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. X If the roller sunblind still does not operate smoothly, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. X The high-voltage components of MAGIC SKY CONTROL are protected behind the headliner. The MAGIC SKY CONTROL voltage transformer is stamped with a high-voltage symbol, warning you about the high voltage. The electric cables of the high-voltage section are color orange. Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL MAGIC SKY CONTROL General notes MAGIC SKY CONTROL is a glass roof, the transparency of which can be changed by applying electrical voltage. MAGIC SKY CONTROL can be switched between darkened and transparent states. i MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automatically after a short period when you turn the SmartKey to position 0 or remove it. Risk of electric shock G DANGER MAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using high voltage. If the headliner behind the panorama roof is damaged or removed, electrical components will be exposed. If you touch these components, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. RNever remove the headliner behind the panorama roof. RIf the headliner is damaged, never touch the electrical components behind it. RAlways have work on the MAGIC SKY CONTROL carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the status it was set to before the engine was switched off. X To change the degree of transparency: press button :. X i At sub-zero temperatures, the change is slower and uneven. The entire process may take some time. Z 93 Opening and closing Panorama roof 94 95 Useful information .............................. 96 Correct driver's seat position ............ 96 Seats .................................................... 97 Steering wheel .................................... 99 Mirrors ................................................. 99 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Memory function ................................. 99 96 Correct driver's seat position Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 27). Correct driver's seat position G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 97). X Check whether you have adjusted seat = properly (Y page 98). When adjusting the seat, make sure that: X Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible are sitting in a normal upright position Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported Ryou can depress the pedals properly X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly. When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint. X Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 99). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted properly (Y page 99). When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 44). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 46). The seat belt should: Rfit snugly across your body routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints Rbe Seats Seats Important safety notes G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The seats can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock. G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. G WARNING If head restraints are not installed and adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions (Y page 99). X Store the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings using the memory function (Y page 99). X 97 98 Seats not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Rdo ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. Front seats Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RAdjusting the seats the head restraints RAdjusting the active multicontour seat RAdjusting the 4-way lumbar support RSwitching the seat ventilation on/off RAdjusting Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. X Rear seats Memory function Problems with the seat heating You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Steering wheel Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RAdjusting the steering wheel wheel heating REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature RSteering Mirrors In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RRear-view mirror mirrors RAutomatic anti-glare mirrors RParking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side RExterior Memory function In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RStoring RCalling settings up a stored setting G WARNING Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. X 99 100 101 Useful information ............................ 102 Exterior lighting ................................ 102 Interior lighting ................................. 105 Replacing bulbs ................................. 105 Lights and windshield wipers Windshield wipers ............................ 106 102 Exterior lighting Useful information Lights and windshield wipers i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 27). Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RHazard warning lamps fogged up on the inside RHeadlamps Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using: Rthe Rthe light switch combination switch (Y page 103) Light switch Operation Driving abroad Symmetrical low-beam headlamps Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low beam in countries in which traffic drives on the opposite side of the road from the country where the vehicle is registered. This prevents glare to oncoming traffic. When using symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not lit as widely and as far ahead as normal. Have the headlamps converted at a qualified specialist workshop as close to the border as possible before driving in these countries. Asymmetrical low beam Have the headlamps converted back to asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible after crossing the border again. 1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to Ã. Exterior lighting The exterior lighting (except the parking/ standing lamps) switches off automatically if you: 103 Cornering light function Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0 RAutomatic headlamp mode headlamps RParking lamps RStanding lamps RLow-beam Combination switch The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. : ; = ? High-beam headlamps Turn signal, right High-beam flasher Turn signal, left In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RTurn signal RHigh-beam RHigh-beam headlamps flasher Lights and windshield wipers Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: 104 Exterior lighting Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus General notes Important safety notes G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not recognize road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may not recognize road users who do have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this or similar situations, the automatic highbeam headlamps will not be deactivated or will be activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time. Lights and windshield wipers Rwho With Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus, you can automatically switch between low-beam, partial high-beam and high-beam headlamps. Partial high-beam is a form of illumination whereby the high-beam is directed past other road users. Other road users are kept out of the high-beam. This prevents glare. When there is a vehicle in front, for example, the high-beam headlamps illuminate the areas to its right and left, and the vehicle in front is illuminated by the low-beam headlamps. The system automatically adapts the lowbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. If the high-beam or partial high-beam are causing too much reflection from traffic signs, the lights are automatically dimmed and glare for the driver caused by the reflections is thus avoided. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Rdirt Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS on/off : ; = ? High-beam headlamps Turn signal, right High-beam flasher Turn signal, left To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up if it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 16 mph (25 km/h): The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users have been detected: The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 28 mph (45 km/h) and other road users have been detected: Partial high-beam is selected automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h): The partial high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. If no other road X users are recognize, the high-beam headlamps are switched on. If you are driving at speeds below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or the roads are adequately illuminated: The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display goes out. Interior lighting An overview of the interior lighting and the overhead control panel can be found in the "At a glance" section. In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RAutomatic interior lighting control interior lighting control RCrash-responsive emergency lighting RManual Replacing bulbs The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Z 105 Lights and windshield wipers Replacing bulbs 106 Windshield wipers Windshield wipers Replacing the wiper blades Switching the windshield wipers on/off Moving the wiper arms to a vertical position On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X Set the windshield wiper to the ° position. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X As soon as the wiper arms are vertical to the hood, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X Remove the SmartKey. X Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield until you feel them snap into place. Lights and windshield wipers X 1 $ Windshield wiper off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/î to wipe the windshield using washer fluid If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off the engine. Remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Set the windshield wipers to position °. X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wiper starts. X When the wiper arms have reached the vertical position, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wipers stop. X Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield until you feel them snap into place. X X Removing a wiper blade G WARNING If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. X To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with one hand. With the other hand, turn the Windshield wipers 107 wiper blade in the direction of arrow : beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade engages in the removal position with an audible click. X To remove a wiper blade: firmly press release knob ; and pull the wiper blade upwards =. Lights and windshield wipers Installing the wiper blades Push the new wiper blade in the direction of arrow : onto the wiper arm until tab ; engages. X Push the wiper blade out of the removal position in the direction of arrow = beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade disengages with an audible click and is freely movable again. X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. X Problems with the windshield wipers You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Z 108 109 Climate control Useful information ............................ 110 Overview of climate control systems ................................................... 110 Operating the climate control systems ................................................... 111 110 Overview of climate control systems Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. Climate control i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 27). Overview of climate control systems General notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Rswitch Rswitch briefly off climate control only briefly on air-recirculation mode only Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and air humidity in the vehicle interior. The air filter cleans the air, thus improving the interior climate. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. Optimum climate control is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated if the ignition is switched off. See the Digital Operator's Manual, keyword "Residual heat". i Ventilate the vehicle in briefly in warm weather conditions, e.g. with the "Convenience opening" function, see the Digital Operator's Manual, keyword "Convenience opening". This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet. i It is possible that the blower may be activated automatically 60 minutes after the SmartKey has been removed depending on various factors, e.g. the outside temperature. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the climate control system. Operating the climate control systems 111 Sets climate control to automatic, left Sets the temperature, left Sets the airflow, left Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode Defrosts the windshield Calls up the COMAND climate control menu (see the separate operating instructions) Switches the rear window defroster on/off Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification Activates/deactivates the residual heat function E Sets the airflow, right F Sets the temperature, right G Sets climate control to automatic, right : ; = ? A B C D Operating the climate control systems In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RSwitching climate control on/off RSwitching cooling with air dehumidification on/off RSetting climate control to automatic the climate mode settings RSetting the temperature RSetting the air distribution RSetting the airflow RAdjusting RSwitching the synchronization function on/ off RDefrosting the windshield the windows RSwitching the rear window defroster on/off RActivating/deactivating air-recirculation mode RSwitching the residual heat function on/off RPerfume atomizer RIonization RSetting the air vents RDefrosting Climate control Automatic climate control panel 112 113 Useful information ............................ 114 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....................................................... 114 Automatic transmission ................... 120 Refueling ............................................ 122 Parking ............................................... 125 Driving tips ........................................ 127 Driving systems ................................ 129 Driving and parking Driving ............................................... 114 114 Driving Driving and parking Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 27). Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Important safety notes The sensor system of some driving and driving safety systems adjusts automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1000 miles (1500 km) The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period. RWhen shifting gears manually, upshift in good time, before the tachometer needle reaches Ô of the way to the red area of the tachometer. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). RAll vehicles (except AMG vehicles): ideally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), drive in program E. Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehicles: RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. RChange gear in good time. RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), drive in program C. After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed. You should also observe these notes on breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Always observe the respective speed limits. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. Driving G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold. Rshoes Rshoes Key positions Driving and parking with thick soles with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. 115 SmartKey G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. g To remove the SmartKey 1 Power supply for some consumers, such G WARNING 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Rlose ! Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. ! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and as the windshield wipers and drive position 3 To start the engine The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started. Start/Stop button General notes All vehicles are equipped with a removable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only Z Driving and parking 116 Driving the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. To start the vehicle without actively using the SmartKey: SmartKey positions with the Start/Stop button Rthe : Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 79). Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey. If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button. Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again. If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button on the front door (Y page 82), you can continue to start the engine with the Start/ Stop button. The engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for approximately three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after starting the engine or lights up while driving, see (Y page 178). If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey being removed from the ignition. X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button : once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example. The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position To switch on the ignition: press Start/ Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. The ignition is switched off when: X Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : once when in this position Driving 117 Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. = Start/Stop button USA ? Start/Stop button Canada Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the SmartKey. It is only possible to switch between Start/ Stop button mode and SmartKey operation when the transmission is in position P. Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle: X Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated Starting the engine Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. ! Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine. General notes During a cold start, the engine runs at higher speeds to enable the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature. The sound of the engine may change during this time. Z Driving and parking Rshifting Driving 118 Automatic transmission Driving and parking X Shift the transmission to position P. You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P. You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. You can start the engine in transmission position P and N. Starting procedure with the SmartKey To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition (Y page 115) lock and release it as soon as the engine is running. Starting procedure with the Start/Stop button The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/ Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. Always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. Pay attention to the important safety notes. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 115). The engine starts. Pulling away General notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 82). It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. If the brake pedal is not depressed, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Information on the automatic release of the electric parking brake can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. Driving General notes After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Hill start assist is not active if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient. transmission is in position N. Rthe electric parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. Rthe ECO start/stop function Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. : ECO start/stop display If the engine has been switched off automatically by the ECO start/stop function, the è ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display. Every time you switch on the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO start/stop function is activated. The ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles). Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RAutomatic engine switch-off engine start RDeactivating/activating the ECO start/ stop function RAutomatic Problems with the engine You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Z Driving and parking G WARNING 119 120 Automatic transmission Automatic transmission Driving and parking Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. DIRECT SELECT lever Overview of transmission positions position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display. You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: REngaging park position P park position P automatically REngaging reverse gear R REngaging drive position D REngaging Shifting to neutral N G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Rshifting j k i h Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission If the transmission is in position D or R: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X Automatic transmission RMake sure that the ignition is switched on. RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. RShift to neutral N. RRelease the brake pedal. RIf the electric parking brake is engaged, release it. RSwitch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. With the Start/Stop button: RMake sure that the ignition is switched on. RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. park position P. RRelease the brake pedal. RPull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition. RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. RSwitch on the ignition. RDepress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. RShift to neutral N. RRelease the brake pedal. RIf the electric parking brake is engaged, release it. RSwitch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. REngage Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RTransmission RTransmission position display positions RDriving tips selector button RSteering wheel paddle shifters RAutomatic drive program RProblems with the transmission RProgram Manual drive program (AMG vehicles) General information In this drive program, you can permanently change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position D. Manual drive program M is different from drive program S with regard to spontaneity, responsiveness and smoothness of gear changes. In addition to permanent drive program M, you can also activate temporary drive program M; see the Digital Operator's Manual. Switching on the manual drive program In manual drive program M, you can change gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters if the transmission is in position D. You can see the currently selected drive program and which gear is engaged in the multifunction display. X Press the program selector button until M appears in the multifunction display; see the Digital Operator's Manual. Upshifting ! In manual drive program M, the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. Z Driving and parking If the engine has been switched off, the automatic transmission automatically shifts to N. If the automatic transmission is to remain in neutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in car washes with a towing device, please observe the following instructions: Using the SmartKey: 121 122 Refueling ! To prevent ESP® from intervening, the ignition must be switched off (SmartKey or the Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) if: Driving and parking Rthe electric parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer. vehicle is being towed with only one axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with 4MATIC). The brake system could otherwise be damaged. Rthe : Gear indicator ; Upshift indicator Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display. X If the color in the speedometer multifunction display changes to red and the UP display message is shown, shift up a gear using the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear if this is permissible. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RDownshifting RSwitching off the manual drive program Transfer case ! Performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a performance test. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. This section is only valid for vehicles with 4wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always transmitted to both axles. Refueling Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with Refueling G WARNING Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged. Refueling General information Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 122). If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside, the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Opening the fuel filler flap Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection system could be blocked by particles from the fuel can. If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. For further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 276). : ; = ? To open the fuel filler flap To insert the fuel filler cap Tire pressure table Fuel type to be used Switch off the engine. X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock: X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of fuel filler flap ;. X Z Driving and parking clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. 123 Refueling 124 Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. Driving and parking X Closing the fuel filler flap Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. X If you drive at speeds above 2 km/h with the fuel filler flap open, the Tankklappe offen (Fuel filler flap open) message is shown in the multifunction display. i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multifunction display (Y page 165). In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up (Y page 176). For further information on warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (Y page 176). Parking 125 Problems with fuel and the fuel tank Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. G WARNING The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. Risk of explosion or fire. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Switch off the engine. X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock: X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Important safety notes G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. Rshift In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. transmission must be in position P and the SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock. Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients. Rthe Z Driving and parking This section provides descriptions of and solutions to safety-relevant problems. Descriptions of and solutions to further problems can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. 126 Parking Driving and parking Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients. Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at the rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients. Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. If the engine cannot be switched off as described here, see "Emergency engine cutoff" (Y page 237). Information in the Digital Operator's Manual A description of how to switch off the engine can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Electric parking brake When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the onboard voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling away. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. X It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The electric parking brake performs a function test at regular intervals while the engine is switched off. The sounds that can be heard while this is occurring are normal. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RApplying/releasing manually RApplying automatically RReleasing automatically REmergency braking General notes G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Rshift Parking the vehicle for a long period You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Driving tips General driving tips Important safety notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second. Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. X Remove unnecessary loads. X Remove roof racks when they are not needed. X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. X X X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or by the service interval display. Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain. Drinking and driving G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Emission control G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. For this reason, all work on the engine must be carried out by qualified and authorized MercedesBenz technicians. The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at Z 127 Driving and parking Driving tips 128 Driving tips Driving and parking regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. ECO display You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Braking Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Heavy and light loads G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Wet roads You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Servicing the brakes You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. AMG high-performance and ceramic brakes You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Driving on wet roads Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RHydroplaning RDriving on flooded roads Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area Driving systems Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Driving systems Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for innovative driver assistance and safety systems which enhance comfort and support the driver in critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a milestone on the path towards autonomous driving. Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all elements of active and passive safety in one well thought out system – for the safety of the vehicle occupants and that of other road users. Further information on driving safety systems (Y page 65). Cruise control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Z Driving and parking around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. 129 130 Driving systems Driving and parking Cruise control lever : ; = ? To activate or increase speed To activate or reduce speed To deactivate cruise control To activate at the current speed/last stored speed When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. In the speedometer, the segments between the stored speed and the maximum speed light up. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RActivation conditions RStoring, maintaining and calling up a speed RSetting a speed cruise control RDeactivating DISTRONIC PLUS General notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is espe- cially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in front or take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Important safety notes G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Roncoming G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by DISTRONIC PLUS. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed. Rthere Z 131 Driving and parking Driving systems 132 Driving systems This speed may: Driving and parking Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive countries) Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right (right-hand drive countries) If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Cruise control lever To activate or increase speed To activate or reduce speed To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS To activate at the current speed/last stored speed A To set the specified minimum distance : ; = ? Activating DISTRONIC PLUS Activation conditions In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes after pulling away before DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP® must be active, but not intervening. RActive Parking Assist must not be activated. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must be closed. Switching on X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ? or press it up : or down ;. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ; for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. or X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : past the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ; for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h). X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ? or press it up : or down ;. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Activating at the current speed/last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. X Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Pulling away and driving X If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed. The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. Be ready to brake at all times. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. Selects the drive program All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving style when you select the S drive program (Y page 121). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the E driving program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic. AMG vehicles: DISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty driving style when you select the S or M drive program (Y page 121). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. When you select the C drive program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic. Changing lanes If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC PLUS supports you when: Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the left lane on left-hand drive vehicles and the right lane on right-hand drive vehicles. Z 133 Driving and parking Driving systems 134 Driving systems Stopping Driving and parking G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. For further information on deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 134). If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. power supply is not sufficient. If a malfunction in the electric parking brake occurs, then the transmission may also be shifted into position P automatically. Rthe Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RSetting a speed the specified minimum distance RDISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instrument cluster RSetting Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards : or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. Driving systems i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. 135 Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door or one of the rear doors is open Rthe vehicle has skidded Ryou activate Active Parking Assist If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. Vehicles traveling on a different line Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS General notes Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations: RCornering, going into and coming out of a bend RVehicles traveling on a different line ROther vehicles changing lanes RNarrow vehicles RObstructions and stationary vehicles RCrossing vehicles In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles traveling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Other vehicles changing lanes Z Driving and parking DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: 136 Driving systems DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Crossing vehicles Driving and parking Narrow vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Obstructions and stationary vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot General notes DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle in the center of the driving lane by means of moderate steering interventions at speeds of 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h). It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera system : at the top of the windshield. At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into account lane markings, e.g. when following vehicles in a traffic jam. At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h) Steering Assist focuses on detected lane Driving systems Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic conditions. If you are following a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of the road, your vehicle could come into contact with the curb or other road boundaries. Be particularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to your vehicle. Obstacles such as building site huts on the lane or projecting out into the lane are not detected. An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. The support provided by the system can be impaired if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road The system is switched to passive and no longer assists you by performing steering interventions if: Ryou actively change lane switch on the turn signal Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or do not steer for a prolonged period of time Ryou i Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated again automatically after a lane change is completed. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not provide any support: Ron very sharp corners a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed Pay attention also to the important safety notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 131). The steering interventions are carried out with a limited steering moment. The system Rwhen Z Driving and parking markings (left and right), and only on the vehicle in front if lane markings are missing. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not provide any support if these conditions do not exist. DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for the function to be available. 137 Driving systems Driving and parking 138 requires the driver to keep his hands on the steering wheel and to steer himself. If you do not steer yourself or if you take your hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged period of time, the system will first alert you with a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol appears in the multifunction display. If you have still not started to steer and have not taken hold of the steering wheel after five seconds at the latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you to take control of the vehicle. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive. DISTRONIC PLUS remains active. Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot by means of steering interventions, symbol : is shown in green. Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. The DTR+: Steering Assist. Off message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated. When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated automatically. HOLD function X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The DTR+: Steering Assist. On message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated. Information in the multifunction display If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated but not ready for a steering intervention, steering wheel symbol : appears in gray. If the system provides you with support General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Driving systems Important safety notes 139 Activating the HOLD function Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away. Further information on deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 139). ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe vehicle is stationary. engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened. Rthe electric parking brake is released. Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N. RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Rthe Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. Ryou shift the transmission to position P. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until ë disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. The HOLD function is then deactivated. Z Driving and parking G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: 140 Driving systems When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Driving and parking Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. power supply is not sufficient. If a malfunction in the electric parking brake occurs, then the transmission may also be shifted into position P automatically. Rthe Magic Body Control General notes MAGIC BODY CONTROL consists of Active Body Control (ABC), ROAD SURFACE SCAN, the CURVE cornering function as well as automatic vehicle stabilization in the event of a crosswind. Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride height to reduce fuel consumption. The suspension mode is adjusted according to your selection (SPORT, COMFORT or CURVE), the road surface conditions and the vehicle load. A multifunction camera detects bumps in the road surface before the vehicle drives over them. This reduces chassis movements. Important safety notes G WARNING When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. ! The vehicle is lowered when the engine is switched off. When parking, position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the curb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you can find information about: RCrosswind driving assistance Body Control (ABC) RROAD SURFACE SCAN RActive AIRMATIC General notes AIRMATIC is an air suspension with variable damping for improved driving comfort. Allround level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. There is also the option to manually adjust the vehicle level. AIRMATIC consists of level setting, level control and the Adaptive Damping System ADS PLUS. Important safety notes G WARNING When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. Driving systems Vehicle level Suspension tuning Setting the raised vehicle level In the Digital Operator's Manual you can find information about: RGeneral RSports 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) It is possible to choose between the "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels. Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is not lit: Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle is raised by 1.0 in (25 mm) compared to the normal level. The Vehicle Rising message appears in the multifunction display. i The message disappears after ten seconds, irrespective of the level reached. If necessary, the vehicle is raised further. The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you: X Rdrive at a speed over approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) for approximately three minutes at a speed over 50 mph (80 km/h) Rdrive Setting the normal vehicle level X Start the engine. 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. less when driving. RAccelerate ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. If indicator lamp ; is lit: X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level. Z Driving and parking notes tuning RComfort tuning 141 142 Driving systems PARKTRONIC Driving and parking Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Range of the sensors General notes PARKTRONIC does not take objects into consideration that are: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani- mals or objects. the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps. Rabove : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example) Rswitch on the ignition the transmission to position D, R or N PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. Rshift The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function cor- rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 217). Front sensors Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) Rear sensors Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) Minimum distance Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm) If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RWarning displays RDeactivating/activating RProblems PARKTRONIC with PARKTRONIC Active Parking Assist indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention and brake application can assist you during parking and when exiting a parking space. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 142). Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the maneuvering range. When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. G WARNING If there are objects above the detection range: RActive Park Assist may steer too early vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. You may cause a collision as a result. There is a risk of an accident. If there are objects above the detection range, stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist. Rthe G WARNING While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could result in a collision with another road user. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. General notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol Z 143 Driving and parking Driving systems 144 Driving systems Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate parking spaces which are not suitable for parking, for example: Driving and parking Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Ron unsuitable surfaces Parking tips: ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park- ing space as possible. spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly. RParking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 143) warning messages during the parking procedure. RYou can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist will then be canceled. RWhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. RMake sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: RParking Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement Rthat Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RDetecting parking spaces RParking RExiting a parking space Active Parking Assist RCanceling Rear view camera General notes Rear view camera : is under a flap in the trunk lid. Rear view camera : is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guide lines in the COMAND display. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. i The text of messages shown in the COMAND display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of rear view camera messages in the COMAND display. Important safety notes The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there Driving systems the trunk lid is open heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif the camera lens fogs up, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid change in temperature Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 217) Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack). The guide lines in the COMAND display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances only apply to road level. ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline. Rthe Rif Rin i The rear view camera is protected from raindrops and dust by means of a flap. When the rear view camera is activated, this flap opens. The flap closes again when: Ryou have finished the maneuvering proc- ess Ryou switch off the engine Ryou open the trunk Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 217). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the rear view camera has been deactivated. The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions: Rvery close to the rear bumper the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the tailgate handle Runder Activating/deactivating the rear view camera To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in COMAND (see Digital Operator's Manual). X Engage reverse gear. The rear view camera flap opens. The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND display with guide lines. The image from the rear view camera is available throughout the maneuvering process. X To deactivate: the rear view camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P or after driving forwards a short distance. Z Driving and parking are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: 145 146 Driving systems Information in the Digital Operator's Manual Driving and parking In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RDisplays in the COMAND display parking" function RWide-angle function RObject detection R"Reverse 360° camera (surround view) General notes The 360° camera is a system consisting of four cameras. The system analyzes images from the following cameras: RRear view camera camera RTwo side cameras in the exterior mirrors The cameras capture the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The 360° camera assists you, for instance when parking or at exits with reduced visibility. The 360° camera images can be shown in full screen mode or in six different split-screen views on the COMAND display. A split-screen view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data supplied by the installed cameras (virtual camera). The six split-screen views are: Rtop view and picture from the rear view camera (130° viewing angle) Rtop view and image from the front camera (130° viewing angle without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle) Rtop view and enlarged rear view Rtop view and enlarged front view Rtop view and images from the rear-facing side cameras (rear wheel view) Rtop view and images from the forwardfacing side cameras (front wheel view) RFront When the function is active and you shift the transmission from D or R to N, the guide lines in the COMAND display are hidden. When you change between transmission positions D and R, you see the previously selected front or rear view. Important safety notes The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. You are always responsible for safety, and must always pay attention to your surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. The 360° camera will not function or will function in a limited manner: Rif the doors are open the exterior mirrors are folded in Rif the trunk lid is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid change in temperature Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 217) Rif the vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Rif Driving systems Switching the 360° camera on and off using the button i The camera in the rear area is protected from raindrops and dust by means of a flap. This flap opens when the 360° camera is activated. The flap closes again when: Ryou have finished the maneuvering proc- ess Ryou switch off the engine Ryou open the trunk Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 217). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the 360° camera has been deactivated. Activation conditions The 360° camera image can be displayed if: RCOMAND is switched on (see the Digital Operator's Manual). RThe 360° Camera function is switched on. i If the 360° camera is activated at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h), a warning message appears. The warning message disappears if: Rthe vehicle's speed falls below approximately 19 mph (30 km/h). The 360° camera is then activated. Rthe message is confirmed with the % button. To switch on: press button :. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown: Rfull screen display with the image from the front camera Rfull screen display with the image from the rear view camera X To deactivate: press button : again. X i You can also switch to the split-screen view from the full-screen view. Activating the 360° camera with COMAND Press the Ø button in the center console. The vehicle menu is displayed. X To select the 360° camera: turn and press the controller. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown: Ra split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or Ra split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera X Further information on the COMAND controller can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Z Driving and parking Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You can otherwise injure others or cause damage to objects or the vehicle. The guide lines in the COMAND display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances only apply to road level. 147 148 Driving systems Driving and parking Activating the 360° camera using reverse gear The 360° camera images can be automatically displayed by engaging reverse gear. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in COMAND (see Digital Operator's Manual). X To show the 360° camera image: engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND display in split-screen mode. You see the top view of the vehicle and the image from the rear view camera. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RSelecting the split-screen and full screen displays RDisplays in the COMAND display RDisplay with the PARKTRONIC display Exiting 360° camera display mode The 360° camera display is stopped Rwhen you select transmission position P, or Rwhen you are driving at moderate speeds The view which was active before the 360° camera was displayed appears in the COMAND display. You can also stop the 360° camera display split-screen view by selecting the % symbol in the display and then confirming with the COMAND controller. ATTENTION ASSIST General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph (200 km/h) Rif you are driving with the active Steer Assist of DISTRONIC PLUS Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and starts assessing your tiredness again if: Ryou switch off the engine. take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break. Ryou Displaying the attention level When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been stopped. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive). Warning in the multifunction display You can have current status information displayed in the assistance menu of the onboard computer. X Select the Assistance display for Attention Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 164). The following information is displayed: Rlength of the journey since the last break. attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low. Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot output a warning, the System Passive message appears. The bar display then changes the display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph (200 km/h). Rthe Activating ATTENTION ASSIST X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 164). The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected: If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: Attention Assist: Take a break! In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning tone. X If necessary, take a break. X Confirm the message by pressing the a button on the steering wheel. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. If a warning is output in the multifunction display, a service station search is performed in COMAND. You can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in COMAND. Standard selected: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal. Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by Attention Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier. Z 149 Driving and parking Driving systems 150 Driving systems Night View Assist Plus Driving and parking General notes your driving style to suit the prevailing road and traffic conditions. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rif In addition to the illumination provided by the normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus uses infrared light to illuminate the road. Night View Assist Plus camera ; picks up the infrared light and displays a monochrome image in the multifunction display. The image shown in the display corresponds to a road lit up by high-beam headlamps. This enables you to see the road's course and any obstacles in good time. When pedestrian recognition is active, pedestrians recognized by the system are visually highlighted in color in the Night View Assist Plus display with small frame corners. In addition, an infrared camera is integrated into the radiator trim :. The camera helps detect pedestrians and animals. Observe the notes on cleaning the infrared camera (Y page 218). i Infrared light is not visible to the human eye and therefore does not glare. Night View Assist Plus can therefore remain switched on even if there is oncoming traffic. Important safety notes Night View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Drive carefully and always adapt there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rif the windshield is dirty, fogged up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rif the thermal imaging camera in the radiator grill is dirty, fogged up or covered Ron bends, hilltops or downhill gradients Rat high outside temperatures Night View Assist Plus cannot display objects directly in front of or beside the vehicle. It may be the case that other objects are marked or highlighted as well as pedestrians and animals. Pedestrian and animal recognition General notes Pedestrian or animal recognition may be impaired or inoperative if: Rpedestrians or animals are partially or entirely obscured by other objects, e.g. parked vehicles Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian or of the animal in the Night View Assist Plus display is incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflections Rpedestrians or animals do not contrast with the surroundings Rthe camera system no longer recognizes pedestrians as persons due to special clothing or other objects Rpedestrians are not in an upright position, e.g. sitting, squatting or lying Ranimals are not recognized by the system, e.g. because of their size or shape The pedestrian and animal recognition is deactivated at temperatures above 90 ‡ (32 †). The spotlight function and automatic delayed switch-off are then no longer active. Driving systems Night View Assist Plus can recognize larger animals such as deer, cows or horses using typical characteristics. The system does not detect: Rsmaller animals, e.g. dogs and cats Ranimals whose silhouette is not clearly rec- : Night View Assist Plus display ; Readiness symbol for active pedestrian recognition = Highlighting ? Pedestrian recognized Night View Assist Plus can recognize pedestrians using typical characteristics, e.g. the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. Pedestrian recognition is then switched on automatically if: RNight View Assist Plus is activated. are driving faster than approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Rit is dark. If pedestrian recognition is active, readiness symbol ; appears. Persons who are detected are highlighted by framing =. If the pedestrian recognition system has brought a pedestrian to your attention, look through the windshield to evaluate the situation. The actual distance to objects and pedestrians cannot be gaged accurately by looking at a screen. Ryou Animal recognition Animals can be recognized in the following situations: Rdarkness Routside built-up areas Rbelow an outside temperature of 90 ‡ (32 †) ognizable. When detected, animals are marked with small color frame corners. In contrast to pedestrian recognition, there is no separate readiness symbol in the multifunction display. Switching Night View Assist on/off Activation conditions You can only activate Night View Assist Plus if all of the following conditions are met: Rthe ignition is switched on (Y page 115) or the engine has been started. Rthe light switch is in the à or L position. Rreverse gear has not been engaged. Activating Night View Assist Plus X Press button :. The Night View Assist Plus display appears in the multifunction display. i The infrared headlamps only switch on in the dark from speeds of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). This means that you do not have the full visual range while the vehicle is stationary and cannot check whether Night View Assist Plus is working. The infraZ Driving and parking Pedestrian recognition 151 152 Driving systems Driving and parking red headlamps are deactivated at speeds below 3 mph (5 km/h). The Night View image continues to be displayed until you deactivate it by pressing button :. Automatic activation You can select the Night View Assist Automatic Activation option via the Night View Assist menu. The pedestrian and animal search function remains active even when the Night View image is not displayed. In the dark, in unlit surroundings and at speeds of more than 60 km/h, the Night View image is automatically displayed in the multifunction display as soon as pedestrians or animals are detected. X In the assistance menu, select automatic delayed switch-off of Night View Assist Plus (Y page 164). Deactivating Night View Assist Plus X Press button :. The Night View Assist Plus display disappears from the multifunction display. Night View Assist is deactivated. Spotlight function General notes Under certain conditions, the spotlight function uses the headlamps to flash at detected pedestrians. The spotlight function is only active if: Rpedestrian Activating the spotlight function The pedestrian detection with spotlight function is running the background. If the prerequisites are met, the spotlight function uses the headlamps to flash four short pulses at a pedestrian detected on or near to the road surface. X In the light menu, select the spotlight function of Night View Assist (Y page 164). The spotlight function does not flash at animals. Display in the assistance graphic Pedestrian symbol : in the assistance graphic indicates the status of the spotlight function. If the symbol is displayed not filled in, the function is switched on. If the symbol is displayed filled in, the conditions for the spotlight function are met. Displaying the assistance graphic X Select the Assistance Graphic menu on the on-board computer (Y page 164). recognition is active road surface is not lit Rthe driving speed is at least 40 mph (60 km/h) Rthe "Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS" function is activated (Y page 105) The spotlight function is not active or is active only to a limited extent if: You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Ryou General notes Rthe are driving in city traffic Rthere are pedestrians located in the area of an oncoming vehicle or a vehicle in front Problems with Night View Assist Driving Assistance PLUS package The Active Driving Assistance PLUS package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 130), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 153) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 155). Active Blind Spot Assist General notes Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle, to monitor the area to the sides of the vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible collision warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the space in the direction of travel and at the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors which are pointed in the direction of travel. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Radar sensors The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer work properly. Monitoring area G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles. Z 153 Driving and parking Driving systems 154 Driving systems Driving and parking Warning display : Warning display Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. The detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of your lane. Due to the nature of the system: Rpoor Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a prolonged time. Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational. The brightness of the warning lamps is automatically adapted to the brightness of the surroundings. When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display. Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the assistance display changes to green ;. Active Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use. Visual and acoustic collision warning If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You will then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Course-correcting brake application If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision. G WARNING A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. ted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Either no braking application, or a coursecorrecting brake application adapted to the driving situation occurs if: Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle. Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the side. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake. RESP® is switched off. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you can find information about: Rswitching on Active Blind Spot Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist General notes If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, display ; underlining the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. A coursecorrecting brake application may be interrup- Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera system : at the top of the windshield. VariZ 155 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 156 Driving systems ous different areas to the front, rear and side of your vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. If you select km in the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function on the on-board computer (Y page 164), Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of road and weather conditions. It may not recognize traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured by snow Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and broken lane markings are detected, no lane-correcting brake application is made. Warning vibration in the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Lane-correcting brake application If you leave your lane, under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane. Driving systems A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake application. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display : appears in the multifunction display. The brake application also slightly reduces vehicle speed. This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). A lane-correcting brake application can be made after driving over a lane marking recognized as being solid or broken. Before this, a warning must be given by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognized. In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a lane-correcting brake application can only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, overtaking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can be detected. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ryou have switched on the turn signal. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. RESP® is switched off. Rthe transmission is not in position D. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed. Ran obstacle in the lane in which you are driving has been detected. Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detect other road users or traffic situations. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you: Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction on the turn signal Rclearly brake or accelerate A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Rswitch Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Rlane markings can no longer be recognized. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you can find information about: RSwitching on Active Lane Keeping Assist i A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. Z Driving and parking G WARNING 157 158 Useful information ............................ 160 Important safety notes ..................... 160 Displays and operation ..................... 160 Menus and submenus ...................... 164 Display messages ............................. 165 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................ 176 On-board computer and displays 159 On-board computer and displays 160 Displays and operation Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 27). Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so and consult a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 33). Displays and operation Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RCoolant temperature display RTachometer RMultifunction ROutside display temperature display Operating the on-board computer 9 : Press and hold: RRapid scrolling in all lists the Radio/Media menu: selects a station, audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Telephone menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open RIn : Multifunction display ; Right control panel = Left control panel X To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. a all menus: confirms the selected entry in the list RIn the Radio/Media menu: opens the list of available radio sources/media RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and starts dialing the selected number ñ Switches off the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions % Press briefly: RBack You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Left control panel ò 9 : RCalls RIn the Radio/Media menu: dese- lects the track or station list or list of available radio sources/ media RHides display messages RExits the telephone book/redial memory up the main menu Press briefly: RScrolls in lists a menu or function RIn the Radio/Media menu: opens the track or station list and selects an audio track or video scene RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or a telephone number RSelects RIn % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Right control panel ~ RRejects RExits ory 6 or ends a call phone book/redial mem- RMakes or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches Z 161 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation 162 Displays and operation On-board computer and displays W X RAdjusts 8 RMute ó Switches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions the volume i Vehicles with the head-up display are equipped with a special windshield. Should repairs be necessary, have the windshield replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Displays and operation Switching the head-up display on or off Head-up display General notes The head-up display projects information from the navigation system and the driver assistance system above the dashboard into the driver's field of vision. A requirement for the display of the contents is that the following functions are available in the vehicle and are switched on: RCruise control PLUS RNavigation The head-up display allows the driver to see all of the information without having to take his eyes off the road. RDISTRONIC Important safety notes The head-up display is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. The visibility of the head-up display is influenced by the following conditions: Rthe driver's seat position positioning of the display image Rthe general ambient light Rsunglasses with polarization filters RWet roads Rblocking of sunlight by objects on the display cover In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of the display may fade. This can be reversed by switching the head-up display off and on again. Rthe X Press button :. When the head-up display is switched on, the display appears in the driver's field of vision. AMG vehicles: press button : to change from Standard on the AMG display and then press button : to turn off the head-up display. Displays and operation On-board computer and displays Head-up display Content and information for the following systems are shown in the head-up display: : Navigation messages ; Current speed = Set DISTRONIC PLUS speed (Y page 130) The selected cruise control speed (Y page 129) : ; = ? 163 Contents and Information in the AMG display in AMG vehicles: Current engine speed Current speed Upshift indicator Currently selected gear, gearshift options when shifting manually Z On-board computer and displays 164 Menus and submenus In the Settings menu, in the submenu head-up display, you have the following settings options: RSwitching other displays on/off (Y page 164) the position (Y page 164) RSetting the brightness (Y page 164) RSetting Menus and submenus Menu overview Press the ò button on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus and select a menu. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 161). You can find more information on the individual menus in the Digital Operator's Manual. Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus: RTrip menu menu (navigation instructions) RRadio menu RMedia menu RTelephone menu RAssistance Graphic menu RService menu RSettings menu RAMG menu in AMG vehicles RNavi Display messages Introduction General notes This section describes display messages relevant to safety together with their solutions. A description of other messages and their solutions can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone. You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function (Y page 138) and parking (Y page 125). Hiding display messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select the message memory. If there are no display messages, you will see No Messages in the multifunction display. If there are display messages, the number of messages stored is shown. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to scroll through the display messages. X X Z 165 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 166 Display messages Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE SAFE®, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are temporarily unavailable. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, PRE SAFE® Brake, PRE SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient. Currently Unavail able See Opera tor's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X !÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE SAFE®, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, PRE SAFE® Brake, PRE SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷ and ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE SAFE®, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, PRE SAFE® Brake, PRE SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Inoperative See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 167 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 168 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE SAFE®, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, PRE SAFE® Brake, PRE SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Currently Unavail able See Opera tor's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions T! ÷ EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE SAFE®, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, PRE SAFE® Brake, PRE SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. Inoperative See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. $(USA only)J(Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 125). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. Z 169 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 170 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. SRS Malfunction Service Required 6 Front Left Malfunc tion Service Required or Front Right Malfunction Service Required 6 Rear Left Malfunc tion Service Required or Rear Right Malfunction Service Required 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required or Right Side Cur tain Airbag Mal function Service Required G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42). The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Man ual The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, even though: Ran adult or Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. G WARNING The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 125). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 52). Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. Z 171 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 172 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 52). Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even though: Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat. G WARNING The air bag may deploy unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 125). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has deactivated the front-passenger air bag (Y page 52). Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Disabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 52). Z 173 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 174 Display messages Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off G WARNING Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 125). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 257 ‡ (125 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 255 ‡ (124 †). Tires Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 125). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 220). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 246). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Warning Tire Mal function The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. could lose control of the vehicle. Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 125). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 220). Ryou Z 175 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 176 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 125). X Close the hood. Ð Power Steering Mal function See Oper ator's Manual The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster General notes This section describes indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster relevant to safety and solutions. A description of other indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and their solutions can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Safety Seat belts Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). The warning tone ceases. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). The warning lamp goes out. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Z 177 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 178 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Safety systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 125). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. $J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 125). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. Therefore BAS (Brake Assist System), BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE SAFE®, PRE SAFE® PLUS, PRE SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also deactivated. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available. Z 179 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 180 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, PRE SAFE®, PRE SAFE® PLUS, PRE SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $J ÷! N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® warning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD, PRE SAFE®, PRE SAFE® PLUS, PRE SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE SAFE®, PRE SAFE® PLUS, PRE SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 181 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 182 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP® is deactivated. G WARNING If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Reactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 72), it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 71). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is faulty. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42). Engine Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 255 ‡ (124 †). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 125). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 214). X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X At coolant temperatures below 257 ‡ (125 †), you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. Z 183 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 184 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Driving systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. Further information on PRE SAFE® Brake (Y page 73). For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 69). Tires Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 125). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 220). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 246). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Rthey h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 185 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 186 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Vehicle Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. 187 Useful information ............................ 188 General notes .................................... 188 Important safety notes ..................... 188 Declarations of conformity .............. 189 Information on copyright ................. 189 Function restrictions ........................ 189 COMAND COMAND operating system ............. 190 188 Important safety notes COMAND Useful information These Operating Instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment of your COMAND system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. These Operating Instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment for Audio 20, as available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your Audio 20 system may not be equipped with all the features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). General notes The COMAND section in these operating instructions describes the basic principles for operating your COMAND. More information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Important safety notes G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and elec- tronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating COMAND. COMAND calculates the route to the destination without taking account of the following, for example: Rtraffic lights and yield signs Rmerging lanes Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no stopping zone Rother road and traffic rules and regulations Rnarrow bridges COMAND can give incorrect navigation commands if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. Digital maps do not cover all areas nor all routes in an area. For example, a route may have been diverted or the direction of a oneway street may have changed. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over the system's driving recommendations. Rstop Function restrictions Declarations of conformity exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Information on copyright General information Information on licenses for free and Open Source software used in your vehicle and in the electronic components can be found on this website: http://www.mercedesbenz.com/opensource. Function restrictions For safety reasons, some functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect. Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves USA only: The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Canada only: The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada licenseZ COMAND Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Please always use this feature instead of consulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons or map display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h) your vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) per second. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 8 inches (20 cm) and more between the radiator and a person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and legs.) 189 190 COMAND operating system COMAND operating system Overview COMAND Components : ; = ? COMAND display DVD changer/single DVD drive Touchpad Controller and buttons COMAND consists of: Rthe COMAND display The COMAND display has 1440 x 540 pixels. Rthe DVD changer/single DVD drive Rthe controller Rthe touchpad Rthe buttons Rports in the center console (2x USB, AUX) An iPod® is connected via USB cable. Rheadphones for the front passenger (cordless or connected by means of a cable to the audio jack in the footwell) i COMAND can be operated from the front-passenger side using the corresponding remote control if your vehicle is equipped with the front-passenger entertainment system. The COMAND display can show separate information for the driver and the front passenger. The front passenger views the display in SPLITVIEW. Functions RHD FM radio/HD AM radio/satellite radio Internet radio (called up via communications functions) RMedia Media support: audio CD, MP3 CD, DVD video, 2 x USB, SD card, iPod®, Bluetooth® audio, 10 GB Media Register on the hard drive Music search using all media RSound systems You can select from three sound systems: Standard sound system Burmester® surround sound system Burmester high-end 3D surround sound system for ultimate listening pleasure RNavigation system Destination entry using keyword search Realistic 3D map with textured city models Navigation functions such as Drive Information and Google Maps™ Dynamic route guidance via SIRIUS satellite radio RCommunication Messaging functions (text messages, email) Address book Internet browser Mercedes-Benz Apps with Google™ Local Search, Destination Download, Weather, Facebook, Google Street View™, Internet radio, stock prices, news and much more WiFi interface for the connection of a smartphone to COMAND Online and the option of remote control for the front passenger (SPLITVIEW) Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website WiFi hotspot functionality to connect a tablet PC or laptop in order to enable access to the Internet using the customer's mobile phone RSIRIUS Weather Weather data as an information chart (current forecast, 5-day preview, detailed information) Weather data on the weather map, e.g. rain radar data, storm characteristics and the track of tropical cyclones (hurricanes, typhoons) RVehicle functions Setting the multicontour seat with new massage program Climate control functions Controlling ambient lighting: several color and brightness level options 360° camera Rear view camera RFavorites functions Fast access to favorites functions using the favorites button on the touchpad Z 191 COMAND COMAND operating system 192 COMAND operating system COMAND COMAND display Example: audio CD mode basic display : Status bar with time, can show other displays ; Main display field = Climate control status display ? Context display in additional display area Controller and buttons Overview : ; = ? A Switches COMAND on/off Adjusts the volume or mutes Touchpad Back button Seat adjustment button COMAND operating system B C D E F G 193 Navigation button Radio button Media button Telephone, address book and Internet button Vehicle and system settings button Controller You can use the % button to exit a menu or to call up the basic display of the current operating mode. X To exit the menu: briefly press the % button. COMAND changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode. X To call up the basic display: press the % button for longer than two seconds. COMAND changes to the basic display of the current operating mode. : Touch-sensitive surface ; Favorites button = Calls up quick access for audio and tele- Controller ? Back button The controller in the center console lets you: X Rselect menu items on the display characters Rselect a destination on the map Rsave entries The controller can be: Renter phone To activate the touchpad: press the surface of the touchpad. Do not press your fingers too hard on the touchpad. Do not use any sharp objects on the touchpad. This can lead to damage to the touchpad or to malfunctions. Rturned Rslid left or right1 forwards or back 4 Rslid diagonally 2 Rpressed briefly or pressed and held Rslid Touchpad As an alternative to the controller, the touchpad enables menu items to be selected and character entry including handwriting recognition, for example. Z COMAND Back button 194 195 Useful information ............................ 196 Stowage areas ................................... 196 Stowage and features Features ............................................. 198 196 Stowage areas Useful information Stowage and features i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 27). Stowage areas Loading guidelines G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: RNever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle (including occupants). The values are specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door. RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the trunk as possible. RThe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. RAlways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for protection. Stowage spaces Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. RAlways store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage compartments, parcel nets or stowage nets. Stowage areas lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 196). Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RGlove box REyeglasses RStowage sole RStowage RStowage seats compartment compartments in the center con- Securing loads using parcel net hooks General notes Observe the following notes on securing loads: RSecure the load using the parcel net hooks. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. Trunk compartment under the armrest compartment under the front RStowage compartments in the doors compartment in the rear-compartment center console RStowage box in the rear seat backrest RStowage Stowage nets Stowage nets are located: Rin the front-passenger footwell Ron the back of the driver's and the frontpassenger seat Ron the left and right-hand side in the trunk Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 196) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 196). There are four parcel net hooks in the trunk. Stowage well under the trunk floor Under the trunk floor you can find a multipurpose recess, e.g. for TIREFIT. Z Stowage and features RClose 197 Features 198 To open: open the trunk lid. X Holding the ribbing, press handle : downwards. Handle : folds upwards. X Swing trunk floor ; upwards using handle : until it rests against the trunk partition. X Features Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RCup holder window roller sunblind RAshtray RCigarette lighter R12 V sockets RCoolbox in the rear compartment RInfrared reflective windshield Stowage and features RRear Sun visors X Fold out hook = on the underside of the trunk floor. Overview G WARNING If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident. Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving. Clip hook = into groove ?. To close: unclip hook = from groove ?. X Fasten hook = to the bracket on the underside of the trunk floor. X Fold the trunk floor down. X X : ; = ? A Mirror light Bracket Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket Vanity mirror Mirror cover Features Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RVanity RGlare mirror in the sun visor from the side 199 Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by mail. You can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system is available if: Rit has been activated and is operational In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: available for transmitting data to the Customer Center Ra service subscription is available Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if: RDownloading RGPS mbrace Information in the Digital Operator's Manual destinations in COMAND & Send RVehicle remote opening RVehicle remote closing RStolen vehicle recovery service RVehicle remote malfunction diagnosis RDownloading routes RSpeed alert RGeo fencing RTriggering the vehicle alarm RSearch i The mbrace system is only available in the USA. General notes The mbrace system is only available in the USA. You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To log in, press the ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 reception is available. vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center. Rthe The mbrace system To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows: X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Use the COMAND volume control. The system offers various services, e.g.: RAutomatic and manual emergency call Assistance call RMB Info call You can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. RRoadside System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis. Z Stowage and features Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is 200 Features A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following occurs: Stowage and features RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test. RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis: - SOS button - F Roadside Assistance call button - ï MB Info call button RThe Inoperative or the Service Not Activated message appears in the multifunction display after the system self-diagnosis. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 Emergency call Important safety notes G WARNING It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if: Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident vehicle is on a dangerous section of road Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle. Rthe General notes Observe the notes on system activation (Y page 199). An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated manually. As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. Features Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system) Rvehicle identification number Rinformation on the severity of the accident Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency. RIf there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle. If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emergency call. This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other means. Making an emergency call To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover : briefly to open. X Press SOS button ; briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. X After the emergency call, close cover :. X If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS button, you will not know whether mbrace placed the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means. Roadside Assistance button X To call Roadside Assistance: press Roadside Assistance button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button : flashes while the call is active. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be made, the Call Con nected message appears in the multifunction display. Z Stowage and features All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example: 201 202 Features If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Stowage and features Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number The COMAND display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem. In the Digital Operator's Manual, you will find information on remote malfunction diagnosis. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified MercedesBenz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. You can find more information in the separate mbrace manual. The system has not been able to initiate a Roadside Assistance call, if: Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button F is flashing continuously. voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. Rno X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding COMAND button for ending a phone call. MB Info call button X To call MB Info: press MB Info call button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while the connection is being made. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be established, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle identification number The COMAND display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. Rvehicle Features Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button ï is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding COMAND button for ending a phone call. Call priority When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. All other calls can be ended by pressing: Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steer- ing wheel corresponding button in COMAND to end the voice call When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted. Rthe The mobile phone is no longer connected to COMAND. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location. Garage door opener General notes The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that: Rhave safety stop and reverse features and current U.S. federal safety standards Once programed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming. Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services: Rmeet RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge) More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com. Notes on the declaration of conformity (Y page 27). RCanada: Z Stowage and features You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz. You can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if: 203 204 Features USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 Stowage and features Important safety notes G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Programming Programming buttons Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 204). Garage door remote control A is not included with the integrated garage door opener. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to control the garage door drive. To start programming mode: press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. The garage door opener is now in programming mode. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as button ;, = or ? is programmed for the first time. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator lamp : will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X To program the remote control: point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm). X Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code (Y page 204). X Release button B on remote control A for the garage door drive system. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. X Synchronizing the rolling code Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 204). If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage Features Notes on programming the remote control Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programming. Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break". Proceed as follows: Rif you live in Canada you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Release the button. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X Press button B of garage door remote control A for two seconds, then release it for two seconds. X Press button B again for two seconds. X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code. X Release button B of remote control A of the garage door drive. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Rif Z Stowage and features door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. The programming button may be positioned at different locations depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming of additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps. Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X Get out of the vehicle. X Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step. X Get into the vehicle. X Press previously programmed button ;, = or ? on the integrated garage door opener until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then complete. 205 206 Features Problems when programming If you are experiencing problems programing the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instructions: Stowage and features RCheck the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control A and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of the garage door drive remote control. The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener. RWhen programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles from the button which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and 12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf another remote control is available for the same garage door drive, repeat the same programming steps with this remote control. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control A. RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. Opening/closing the garage door After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. Clearing the memory Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X Press and hold buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green. X Release buttons ; and ?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared. Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use Features 207 Stowage and features loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. Driver's seat/front-passenger seat: slide the respective seat back. X Rear seats: slide the respective seat forwards. X To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ; until you hear them engage. X To remove: pull the floormat from retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. X Z 208 209 Useful information ............................ 210 Engine compartment ........................ 210 ASSYST PLUS .................................... 216 Maintenance and care Care .................................................... 216 210 Engine compartment Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. Engine compartment off the ignition reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts Hood G WARNING i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 27). Maintenance and care G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Important safety notes G WARNING If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlatch the hood while driving. G WARNING When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. Open and close the hood only when no one is within its range of movement. G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. Rswitch Rnever The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch components which are under voltage, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of injury. Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. Opening the hood G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. Engine compartment Engine oil General notes Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. Rthe Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off. X Pull release lever : on the hood. The hood is released. X Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick (except S 65 AMG) X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; up and lift the hood. Once you have lifted the hood about 15 inches (40 cm), it is automatically opened the rest of the way and held open by the gas-filled struts. G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. Closing the hood Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm). X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. X Z Maintenance and care ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood. 211 Engine compartment 212 Example Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil. Maintenance and care X Engine compartment 213 Checking the oil level using the on-board computer (S 65 AMG) Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Engine Oil Level submenu. X Press a to confirm the selection. The Measuring engine oil level accurate only when vehicle is level message appears in the multifunction display. X X The measurement takes a few seconds. You will see one of the following messages in the multifunction display: Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Maintenance and care Display messages Engine Oil Level OK The oil level is correct. The oil level is too low. Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 Liter) X Top up 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil. Reduce Engine Oil Level For Engine Oil Level Ignition Must Be On Need More Time to Check Engine Oil Level The engine oil level is too high. Have excess engine oil siphoned off. X The ignition is switched off. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. The required waiting period was not observed. X If the engine is at normal operating temperature: repeat the measurement after about five minutes. If the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly: repeat the measurement after approximately 30 minutes. The engine is running; oil level measurement is not possible. Engine Oil Level Not Measurable X Switch off the engine. with Engine Running X If the engine is at normal operating temperature: wait about five minutes before carrying out the measurement. If the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly: wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. Adding engine oil G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Z 214 Engine compartment Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING Maintenance and care If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine. H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service center. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after the interval for replacement specified by the service system has been exceeded Rusing engine oil additives. ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off. Example Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 211). X Further information on engine oil (Y page 277). Additional service products Checking coolant level G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the engine is warm. When Engine compartment opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before opening the cap. Wear eye and hand protection when opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a turn to allow pressure to escape. 215 If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in expansion tank ;. X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 279). G WARNING Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). or X Press Start/Stop button twice (Y page 115). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 158 ‡ (70 †). X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 (Y page 115) in the ignition lock. or X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (Y page 115). X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counterclockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. X Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. X X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. Place cap : on the edge of the filler neck and engage in place. Z Maintenance and care Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system Care 216 X X Add the premixed washer fluid. To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to add washer fluid. Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 280). brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Exterior care Automatic car wash Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS The Digital Operator's Manual contains more information on the ASSYST PLUS service interval display. Care General notes H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows are fully closed. Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (the OFF button has been pressed). Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0. Rthe 360° camera or rear view camera is switched off. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. Care Rusing a car wash a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Rusing ! Make sure that the automatic transmission is in neutral position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ROperating with the SmartKey: Do not remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission position D or R the automatic transmission will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels. ROperating with the Start/Stop button: Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission position D or R the automatic transmission will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels. Operating with the Start/Stop button: Make sure that the ignition is switched on. Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Engage park position P. X Release the brake pedal. X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (Y page 115). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Switch on the ignition. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake, if necessary. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X X You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield. Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N neutral: Operating with the SmartKey: Information in the Digital Operator's Manual Make sure that the ignition is switched on. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake, if necessary. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. RWashing X In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: by hand washers RCleaning the paintwork RMatte finish care RCleaning the wheels RCleaning the windows RCleaning wiper blades RCleaning the exterior lighting RCleaning the mirror turn signals RCleaning the sensors RCleaning the rear view camera RPower Z Maintenance and care ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk: 217 218 Care RCleaning RCleaning the 360° camera the exhaust pipe Interior care In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RCleaning the display Night and Day View Assist RCleaning the plastic trim RCleaning the steering wheel and selector lever RCleaning genuine wood and trim strips RCleaning the seat covers RCleaning the seat belts RCleaning the headliner and carpets Maintenance and care RCleaning 219 Useful information ............................ 220 Where will I find...? ........................... 220 Flat tire .............................................. 220 Battery (vehicle) ................................ 225 Jump-starting .................................... 229 Towing and tow-starting .................. 232 Roadside Assistance Fuses .................................................. 235 220 Flat tire Useful information Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 27). Roadside Assistance Where will I find...? Vehicle tool kit General notes The towing eye is located in the stowage well under the trunk floor. i Apart from certain country-specific variations, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. If the vehicle is equipped with tire-changing tools, these are located in the stowage well under the trunk floor. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tire changing tools are required and approved to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tools required for changing a wheel may include, for example: RJack RWheel chock wrench RRatchet wrench RAlignment bolt RLug Example : Tire sealant filler bottle ; Towing eye = Tire inflation compressor Open the trunk lid. Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 197). X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 222). X X Flat tire Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: Rtires with run-flat characteristics (MOExtended tires) (Y page 221) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 220) Information on changing/mounting a wheel (Y page 261). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 125). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the engine. Flat tire MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) General notes With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. The affected tire must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the loadbearing capacity and the speed index (Y page 255). MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure monitor. If the pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: RObserve the instructions in the display messages (Y page 175). RCheck the tire for damage. RIf driving on, observe the following notes. The maximum driving distance is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden. In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: RSpeed RRoad condition temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). ROutside i When replacing one or all tires, make sure that you use only tires: Rof the size specified for the vehicle and Rmarked "MOExtended" If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire). i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Roadside Assistance Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (Y page 115). or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock: X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. X 221 222 Flat tire Important safety notes G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Roadside Assistance Rthe RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. Rthere TIREFIT kit Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tire sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). G WARNING In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above. wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Using the TIREFIT kit Flat tire Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket (Y page 198) in your vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X Press on/off switch = on the tire inflation compressor to I. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase. X X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out of the housing. X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire sealant bottle :. X Place tire sealant bottle : head downwards into recess ; of the tire inflation compressor. X Allow the tire inflation compressor to run for five minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure reached" (Y page 224). If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 223). i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible. Tire pressure not reached If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes: Switch off the tire inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m). X Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of five minutes the tire pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi). X X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tire. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X Z Roadside Assistance Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation compressor from the stowage well underneath the trunk floor (Y page 220). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire. X 223 Flat tire 224 G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Tire pressure reached Roadside Assistance G WARNING A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision. ! Residue from the tire sealant may come out of the filler hose after use. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. i In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values. X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor. H Environmental note Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes: Switch off the tire inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor. X X X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pressure release button E next to pressure gauge F. Battery (vehicle) Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installation. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rbraking Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. i For further information about ABS and ESP®, see (Y page 66) and (Y page 71). All vehicles except AMG vehicles: G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jumpstarting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A buildup of electrostatic charge can be caused, for example: Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Rif you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. Z Roadside Assistance When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire. X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the sealed tire. X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filler hose remains attached to the tire sealant bottle. X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there. X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X 225 226 Battery (vehicle) RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. Roadside Assistance G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. All vehicles: H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. ! Always have work on the batteries carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12- volt battery yourself, please observe the following: Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. Ryou switch off the engine and remove the SmartKey. Make sure the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged. Ryou first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Rthe transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. The batteries and the covers of the positive terminal clamps must always be installed securely during operation. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and faceguard. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Contact a physician if necessary. Wear eye protection. Battery (vehicle) Observe this Operator's Manual. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information. Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time. i Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. Charging the battery AMG vehicles: ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.4 V. All other vehicles G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. All vehicles: ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstarting connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 229). X Open the hood. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 229). Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for MercedesZ Roadside Assistance Keep children away. 227 Roadside Assistance 228 Battery (vehicle) Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. All vehicles except AMG vehicles: if the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jumpstart the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. AMG vehicles: at low temperatures, do not charge a battery which has been removed using a battery charger. Allow the battery to warm up gently first, if necessary. Otherwise, the service life can be shortened and the starting characteristics impaired, especially at low temperatures. Jump-starting 229 Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment. All vehicles except AMG vehicles: G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel. If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. All vehicles: Z Roadside Assistance G WARNING Jump-starting 230 Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: Roadside Assistance RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RKeep away from fire and open flames. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. RAll vehicles except AMG vehicles: do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RDo not lean over the battery. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections. Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 115). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 115). X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc. X Open the hood. Rwhen Example: ground point cover X X Turn fasteners : one Õ turn and remove. Remove the cover whilst pressing down on cap ; of the washer fluid reservoir. Position number D identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device. X Slide cover C of positive terminal = in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal = on your vehicle to positive terminal ? of donor battery D using the jumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal = on your own vehicle first. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal A of donor battery D to ground point B of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery D first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point B and negative terminal A, then from positive clamp = and positive terminal ?. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover C of positive clamp = after removing the jumper cables. Replace the ground point cover. Make sure all mountings for the fasteners are positioned precisely beneath the corresponding recesses in the cover. X Press fasteners : into the mountings until they engage. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Z 231 Roadside Assistance Jump-starting 232 Towing and tow-starting Towing and tow-starting Important safety notes G WARNING Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running. brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning. Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system. If your vehicle is being towed, much more force may be necessary to steer or brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, make sure that the steering moves freely. Roadside Assistance Rthe G WARNING You can no longer steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock has been engaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch off the ignition when towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rthe towing eye could detach itself vehicle/trailer combination could rollover. There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Rthe Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 274). ! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eye only. Otherwise, the vehicle could become damaged. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! Shift the automatic transmission to N and do not open the driver's or front passenger's door during towing. The automatic transmission may otherwise shift to position P, which could damage the transmission. ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed away. If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. Towing and tow-starting turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot release the electric parking brake Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N Rcannot i Deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 82). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Installing/removing the towing eye Installing the towing eye Removing the towing eye Unscrew and remove the towing eye. Attach cover : to the bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit/ stowage tray. X X Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 232). The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: You must use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 115). X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in position 0. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 102). i In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. After resetting the combinaX The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear under covers :. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit/stowage tray (Y page 220). X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove cover : from the opening. X Screw in and tighten the towing eye clockwise to the stop. Z Roadside Assistance If the automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position N, have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: 233 234 Towing and tow-starting tion switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again. Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed with the rear axle raised. Roadside Assistance ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 102). X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position. X If necessary, turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle. When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 232). Transporting the vehicle ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Secure the vehicle. X Notes on 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is damaged, have the vehicle transported on a truck or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system: if the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 229). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission. i Information on "Jump-starting" (Y page 229). Fuses Important safety notes G WARNING If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the trunk (Y page 236). If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell RFuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel RFuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel Dashboard fuse box ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. Before changing a fuse Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 125). X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 115). or X When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 115). X Open the driver's door. X To open: pull cover : outwards in the direction of the arrow and remove it. X To close: clip in cover : on the front of the dashboard. X Fold cover : inwards until it engages. X Z Roadside Assistance Fuses 235 Fuses 236 Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. X Roadside Assistance X X X Open the hood. To open: release retaining clamps : and remove cover ;. Open the front-passenger door. Fold cover : down and remove it. Fuse box in the engine compartment G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box. X Undo screws = on the fuse box. X Remove fuse box cover ? forwards. X To close: check whether the seal is lying correctly in cover ?. X Insert cover ? at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer. X Fold down cover ? of the fuse box and tighten screws =. X Insert cover ; and secure with retaining clamps :. X Close the hood. X Fuse box in the trunk ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. Fuses 237 ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. Open the trunk lid. To open: release cover : at the top right and left-hand sides with a flat object. X Open cover : downwards in the direction of the arrow. X Roadside Assistance X i The fuse allocation chart is located in a recess at the side of the fuse box. You can find the corresponding fuse rating and fuse type on the fuse allocation chart. Engine emergency off If the engine cannot be switched off as described, observe the following procedure: Take the fuse allocation chart from the fuse box in the trunk (Y page 236). X Search for “Emergency engine shutdown” in the fuse allocation chart. X Remove the fuses listed under "Emergency engine shutdown". X Z 238 239 Useful information ............................ 240 Important safety notes ..................... 240 Operation ........................................... 240 Winter operation ............................... 242 Tire pressure ..................................... 243 Loading the vehicle .......................... 249 All about wheels and tires ............... 254 Changing a wheel .............................. 261 Wheels and tires Wheel and tire combinations ........... 266 240 Operation Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 27). Tires with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not being used correctly can impair operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal Important safety notes Wheels and tires G WARNING If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct: stipulations recommendations Information on the dimensions and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section (Y page 266). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Rfactory Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar (Y page 249) Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap (Y page 123) Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 243) Rdesignation Rmodel When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rmodel G WARNING A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tires without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tire. replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Rimmediately Operation Information on driving If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire pressures and correct them if necessary. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Operation Regular checking of wheels and tires The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors: RDriving style pressure RDistance covered RTire Notes on tire tread Regularly check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tire tread depth for: Rcuts RSummer G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. in the tires Rpunctures Rtears in the tires on tires Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 241). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (Y page 243). Rbulges tires: â in (3 mm) tires: ã in (4 mm) For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached. RM+S Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been Z Wheels and tires When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged. 241 242 Winter operation reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced. Selecting, mounting and replacing tires Wheels and tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 221). ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure monitor and only on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a flat tire (Y page 221). i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation General notes You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. M+S tires G WARNING M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Snow chains G WARNING If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. Tire pressure To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever install snow chains to the front wheels Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. 243 General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire and Loading Information placard Tire pressure Tire pressure specifications Important safety notes G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel: Rmonthly, at least the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Runder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Rif i The specifications on the sample Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure tables are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle. : Recommended tire pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 249). The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted for this vehicle by the factory Z Wheels and tires Rthe 244 Tire pressure The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. i The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Important notes on tire pressure Wheels and tires Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for that tire size. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ. Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 255). If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure can be checked in the on-board computer. The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load. Tire pressure Rif the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ 1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Underinflated tires may: Roverheat, leading to tire defects affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption Radversely Overinflated tires G WARNING Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Overinflated tires may: Rincrease the braking distance affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort Rbe more susceptible to damage Wheels and tires Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Radversely Maximum tire pressures Underinflated or overinflated tires Underinflated tires G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel. 245 : Example: maximum permissible tire pres- sure Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 243). Z Tire pressure 246 i The actual values for tires are vehiclespecific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Checking the tire pressures Important safety notes Observe the notes on tire pressure (Y page 243). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are installed in all wheels. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display; see illustration (example). Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap Rin the "Tire pressure" section Wheels and tires Checking tire pressures manually To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows: Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked. X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. X Read the tire pressure and compare it with the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 243). X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to the recommended value. X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by pressing down the metal pin in the valve. Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then, check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires. X Tire pressure monitor General notes If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (Y page 248). Important safety notes G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once every two weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, you should stop and check your tires as soon Tire pressure It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (Y page 243). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjust- ing the pressure of the cold tires (Y page 248). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 243). The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers. The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. i In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. You can find further information under: (Y page 175). If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning, it may take up to ten minutes for the tire pressure warning lamp to inform you of the malfunction by flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving. The tire pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea Z Wheels and tires as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. 247 Tire pressure 248 level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Checking the tire pressure electronically Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the a button. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. X Press the a button. The current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display. Wheels and tires X If the vehicle has been parked for over 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message appears. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active display message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored. Tire pressure monitor warning messages If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display and the yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp comes on. the Please Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low and must be corrected at the next opportunity. RIf the Check Tires message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly and the tires must be checked. RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly and the tires must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section (Y page 175). RIf i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Restarting the tire pressure monitor When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. X Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving sit- Loading the vehicle 249 If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the a button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor In certain countries, a radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor may be required. The radio type approval number for the tire pressure monitor can be found in the "Wheels and tires" section of the Digital Operator's Manual. Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maxiZ Wheels and tires uation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 243). Additional tire pressure values for different loads can also be found on the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (Y page 243). X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the a button. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure for the individual tires or the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message. X Press the : button. The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message appears in the multifunction display. Loading the vehicle 250 mum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. : B-pillar, driver's side Wheels and tires Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating Number of seats Maximum number of seats : indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Determining the correct load limit X Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the specified value. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehiclespecific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Step-by-step instructions The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. Loading the vehicle 251 Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. Wheels and tires X Z 252 Loading the vehicle Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 249). The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Example 1 Step 1 RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard): 1500 lbs (680 kg) Step 2 RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 5 of the occupants - Front: 2 - Rear: 3 RWeight of the occupants - Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) - Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) - Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) - Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) - Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) RTotal weight of all occupants: 750 lbs (340 kg) Step 3 Wheels and tires RDistribution RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants): 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg) Example 2 Step 1 RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard): 1500 lbs (680 kg) Step 2 RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 3 of the occupants Front: 1 Rear: 2 RDistribution - Loading the vehicle 253 RWeight of the occupants Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) - Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg) - Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg) RTotal weight of all occupants: 540 lbs (245 kg) Step 3 - RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants): 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 540 lbs (245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) Example 3 Step 1 RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard): 1500 lbs (680 kg) Step 2 RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 2 of the occupants: - Front: 1 RWeight of the occupants - Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) RTotal weight of all occupants: 150 lbs (68 kg) Step 3 RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants): 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg) Vehicle identification plate Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 249). Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. Z Wheels and tires RDistribution 254 All about wheels and tires All about wheels and tires Treadwear Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions. Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards Wheels and tires Traction Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and = temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire. Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum tire width. Example: RTreadwear grade: 200 grade: AA RTemperature grade: A All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades. RTraction i The actual values for tires are vehiclespecific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. G WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train. The traction grades – from highest to lowest – are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth (Y page 241). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than All about wheels and tires on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. 255 Tire labeling Overview Temperature G WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. : Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (Y page 259) ; DOT, Tire Identification Number (Y page 258) Maximum tire load (Y page 258) Maximum tire pressure (Y page 245) Manufacturer Tire material (Y page 259) Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating (Y page 255) D Load index (Y page 258) E Tire name = ? A B C The markings described above are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident. Z Wheels and tires The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. 256 All about wheels and tires Wheels and tires Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. : ; = ? A B Tire width Nominal aspect ratio in % Tire code Rim diameter Load bearing index Speed rating General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: these are compact emergency spare wheels at high tire pressure, to be used only temporarily in an emergency. Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcu- lated by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 249). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 258). For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (Y page 258). Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) All about wheels and tires S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) Index Speed rating T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have the i snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow. An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph (210km/h). The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (Y page 266). Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Or M+S i for winter tires. Z Wheels and tires Speed rating tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). The service specification is made up of load-bearing index A and speed rating B. RIf the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed. 1 All-weather tires and winter tires Index ROptionally, 257 258 All about wheels and tires Load index ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 249). i The actual values for tires are vehiclespecific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) Wheels and tires US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced. In addition to the load-bearing index, load index : may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this after the letter that identifies the speed rating (Y page 255). RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Maximum load rating Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissi- The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and manufacturing date A. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol : marks that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. All about wheels and tires i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Tire characteristics This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall : and under tire tread ;. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U S Department of Transportation. Normal occupant weight The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Recommended tire pressures The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Z Wheels and tires Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in 2008. 259 260 All about wheels and tires Speed rating The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved. Wheels and tires GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Maximum loaded vehicle weight The maximum weight is the sum of: Rthe curb weight of the vehicle weight of the accessories Rthe load limit Rthe weight of the factory installed optional equipment Rthe Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely. Curb weight The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum load rating The maximum load rating is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) Changing a wheel Tread The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. Bead The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim. Total load limit Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. Weight of optional extras The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a highperformance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load bearing index The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire. Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. Treadwear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Changing a wheel Flat tire The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 220) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 221). Rotating the wheels G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions. ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (Y page 262). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Z Wheels and tires Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead. 261 Changing a wheel 262 Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and reactivate the tire pressure monitor if necessary (Y page 248). Wheels and tires Direction of rotation Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tires are installed corresponding to the direction of rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. Make sure that "normal" level is selected for AIRMATIC (Y page 140). X Switch off the engine. X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (Y page 115). or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock: X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. X Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. Mounting a wheel Preparing the vehicle Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position. X Shift the transmission to position P. X If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit (Y page 220). The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. Changing a wheel 263 Observe the following when raising the vehicle: X On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. X On light downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. ! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. raise the vehicle, only use the vehiclespecific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity due to the restricted height. RMake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). RNever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. RDo not lie under the vehicle. RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid when the vehicle is raised. RMake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Vehicles with AMG wheels and hub caps: the hub cap covers the wheel bolts. Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must Z Wheels and tires RTo Changing a wheel 264 remove the hub cap. Two different variants can be installed. Vehicles with AMG wheels and plastic hub caps: To remove: turn the center cover of hub cap : counter-clockwise and remove. X To install: before installing, ensure that hub cap : is in the open position. To do so, turn the center cover counter-clockwise. X Put hub cap : in position and turn the center cover clockwise until you feel and hear hub cap : engage. X Make sure that hub cap : is installed securely. Wheels and tires X To install: before installing, check hub cap : and the wheel area for soiling and clean if necessary. X Put hub cap : in position and turn until it is in the right position. X Position socket ; on hub cap :. X Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and tighten hub cap :. The tightening torque must be 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). X i Note that the hub cap should be tightened to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the hub cap installed at a qualified specialist workshop. X Using lug wrench =, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Vehicles with AMG wheels and aluminum hub caps: To remove: take socket ; and lug wrench = from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 220). X Position socket ; on hub cap :. X Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and loosen hub cap : counter-clockwise. X Remove hub cap :. X The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows). Changing a wheel X 265 Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are visible. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel. X X Position jack A at jacking point ?. X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point. Turn ratchet wrench B until jack A sits completely on jacking point ? and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn ratchet wrench B until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. X Removing a wheel ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in. When mounting/removing wheels, and for as long as the wheels are removed, avoid applying any external force on the brake disks. This could impair the level of comfort when braking. G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 261). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been Z Wheels and tires Mounting a new wheel Wheel and tire combinations 266 approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt. Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visible. X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The tightening torque must be 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the trunk again. X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (Y page 243). X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. X Unscrew the alignment bolt. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. Wheels and tires X Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. i Vehicles with a tire pressure control system: all mounted wheels must be equipped with functioning tire pressure control sensors. Wheel and tire combinations General notes ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. Wheel and tire combinations RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- tain AMG tires) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Overview of abbreviations used in the following tire tables: RBA: both axles front axle RRA: rear axle The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found: RFA: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard with the recommended tire pressures on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions (Y page 243). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle with: Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/ right) Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 221). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. i Not all wheel and tire combinations are available at the factory for all countries. i On the following pages, you can find information on approved wheel rims and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter tires. Winter tires are not available at the factory as standard equipment or optional extras. If you would like to equip your vehicle with approved winter tires, you may also, in certain circumstances, require rims of the appropriate size. The size of the approved winter tires may deviate from that of the standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equipment installed at the factory. The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Wheels and tires These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: 267 Wheel and tire combinations 268 Tires S 550 4MATIC All-weather tires R 18 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 245/50 R18 100 H2 RA: 245/50 R18 100 H2, 3 FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.39 in (35.3 mm) Wheels and tires R 19 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL2 RA: 275/40 R19 101 H2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm) Summer tires R 18 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 245/50 R18 100 W2 RA: 245/50 R18 100 W2, 3 FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.39 in (35.3 mm) R 19 2 3 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XL2 RA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm) Available as MOExtended tires. Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. Wheel and tire combinations 269 R 20 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL2 RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm) FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL2 RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL2, 4 RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) Tires Alloy wheels FA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+Si2 RA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+S i2, 3 FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.39 in (35.3 mm) Wheels and tires Winter tires R 18 R 19 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+S i2 RA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+S i2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm) RA: 9 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.20 in (30.5 mm) BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+S i2 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) Available as MOExtended tires. Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 4 Only for vehicles with AMG Line equipment code 951. 2 3 Z Wheel and tire combinations 270 S 63 AMG 4MATIC Summer tires R 19 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 255/45 ZR19 (104 Y) XL5 RA: 285/40 ZR19 (107 Y) XL3, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) FA: 255/45 ZR19 (104 Y) XL5 RA: 285/40 ZR19 (107 Y) XL3, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) R 20 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL3, 6 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XL6 RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL3, 6 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) Wheels and tires XL6 Winter tires R 19 Tires Alloy wheels BA: 255/45 R19 104 V XL M+S i5 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) BA: 255/45 R19 104 V XL M+S i5 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) Not in combination with a ceramic brake system. Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 6 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations". 5 3 Wheel and tire combinations 271 R 20 Tires Alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i6 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i6 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i6 RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+S i3, 6 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i6 RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+S i3, 6 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) S 65 AMG 6 3 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XL6 RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL3, 6 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XL6 RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL3, 6 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) Wheels and tires Summer tires R 20 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations". Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. Z Wheel and tire combinations 272 Winter tires R 20 Alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i6 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i6 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i6 RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+S i3, 6 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i6 RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+S i3, 6 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) Wheels and tires Tires 6 3 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations". Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 273 Useful information ............................ 274 Information regarding technical data .................................................... 274 Identification plates ......................... 274 Service products and filling capacities ..................................................... 275 Technical data Vehicle data ....................................... 281 Identification plates 274 Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 27). Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) ; VIN = Vehicle model Information regarding technical data Technical data i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) ; VIN = Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate. X Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Service products and filling capacities Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) 275 Service products and filling capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Open the front right-hand door. Fold cover : down and remove it. You will see the VIN. The VIN can also be found in the following locations: Ron the lower edge of the windshield (Y page 275) Ron the vehicle identification plate (Y page 274) Engine number : Engine number (stamped into the crank- case) ; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) = Emission control information plate, including the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner. Service products include the following: RFuels RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid control system refrigerant Components and service products must be matched. Only use products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of products which have not been recommended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in the appropriate section. Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at an authorized MercedesBenz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RClimate RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in RMB Z Technical data X X Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. 276 Service products and filling capacities accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Other identifications, for example: R0 W-30 R5 W-30 R5 W-40 Fuel Tank capacity Model All models Technical data Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. 21.1 US gal (80.0 l) Model Of which reserve AMG vehicles Approx. 3.2 US gal (12.0 l) All other models Approx. 2.1 US gal (8.0 l) Important safety notes G WARNING Total capacity Gasoline Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/ 95 RON. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol) RE100 (100% ethanol) RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol) RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) RGasoline with metalliferous additives RDiesel Service products and filling capacities ! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used. If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline of a lower grade, observe the following precautions: ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible. RDo not drive at the maximum speed. RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm. You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance. i For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower AKI. Information on refueling (Y page 123). Additives ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives. The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the injection system as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Engine oil General notes ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a specification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment. When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 275). The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use Z Technical data Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. Do not use additives. Otherwise, engine damage may occur. This does not include cleaning additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixed with cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 277 278 Service products and filling capacities engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Model Engine model MB Approval S 550 4MATIC 278 229.5 S 63 AMG 4MATIC 157 229.5 S 65 AMG 279 229.5 i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers. Filling capacities Technical data The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Model S 63 AMG 4MATIC S 65 AMG All other models Capacity 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) 11.1 US qt (10.5 l) 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Additives ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Engine oil viscosity Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it is thin. Select an engine oil with an SAE classification (viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside temperatures. The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The lowtemperature characteristics of engine oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore strongly recommended that you carry out regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. Brake fluid G WARNING The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling brake fluid (Y page 275). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Service products and filling capacities i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Coolant Important safety notes G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Rcorrosion protection protection Rraising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 ‡ (130 †). The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rantifreeze Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1 . i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. i The coolant is checked with every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. Filling capacities Model S 63 AMG 4MATIC Capacity 8.2 US qt (7.8 l) S 65 AMG 11.3 US qt (10.7 l) All other models 12.8 US qt (12.1 l) i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Z Technical data Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. 279 280 Service products and filling capacities Windshield washer system Important safety notes G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. Technical data ! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked. At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir. i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. ! Only the refrigerant R 134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged. Service work, such as topping up refrigerant or replacing components, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations must be adhered to, SAE standard J639 included. Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Refrigerant instruction label Example: refrigerant instruction label : Warning symbol ; Refrigerant filling capacity = Applicable SAE standards ? PAG oil part number A Type of refrigerant Warning symbols : indicate: Climate control system refrigerant Important safety notes The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R 134a. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member. Rpossible dangers service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop Rhaving Filling capacities Model Refrigerant All models 23.3 ± 0.4 oz (660 ± 10 g) Vehicle data PAG oil S 63 AMG 4MATIC 3.5 oz (100 g) All other models 3.9 oz (110 g) Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tires - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload. Dimensions and weights Missing values were not available at time of going to print. AMG vehicles Vehicle length 198.6 in (5044 mm) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 83.0 in (2108 mm) Vehicle height 56.0 in (1422 mm) Wheelbase 115.9 in (2945 mm) Maximum roof load Maximum trunk load 220 lb (100 kg) All other models Vehicle length 197.9 in (5027 mm) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 83.0 in (2108 mm) Vehicle height 55.9 in (1419 mm) Wheelbase 115.9 in (2945 mm) Maximum roof load Model : Opening height AMG vehicles 69.1 in (1755 mm) All other models 69.1 in (1754 mm) Maximum trunk load 220 lb (100 kg) Model Turning radius S 63 AMG 4MATIC 39.0 ft (11.90 m) All other models 38.1 ft (11.60 m) Z Technical data Model 281 282 283 284